JP2021037005A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a suitable backup process.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine includes: a microcomputer for performance control; and a 1-1st backup storage unit 95AK001 to a second backup storage unit 95AK004 capable of storing backup data. The microcomputer for performance control can execute a first backup process (process of transfer to a backup memory board) for storing manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-1st backup storage unit 95AK001 to a 1-3rd backup storage unit 95AK003. The control microcomputer for performance control can execute a second backup process (process of transfer to the backup memory board) for storing store confirmation data in the second backup storage unit 95AK004 with a priority different from that of the first backup process, the second backup process having a shorter execution time than the first backup process.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure23-1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Patent Document 1 describes a batch backup process for collectively backing up the first information when the regularly generated backup condition is satisfied, and a second when the regularly generated backup condition is satisfied. A gaming machine that performs a split backup process that divides and backs up information is disclosed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-23552

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, for example, the possibility of power failure or the like occurring during the backup process is not considered, and there is a possibility that a suitable backup process cannot be performed.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a suitable backup process.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Control means (for example, microcomputer 120 for effect control) and
A storage means capable of storing backup data (for example, a backup memory board 14) is provided.
The control means
Based on the establishment of the first backup condition, the first backup process (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data on the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means (Transfer processing, etc.) can be executed,
A second backup process (for example, a backup memory) having an execution time shorter than that of the first backup process for storing the second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition. It is possible to execute the process of transferring the store confirmation data to the board 14 in a priority order different from that of the first backup process (for example, the backup of the store confirmation data is more than the backup of the manufacturer confirmation data). It is done in a short execution time, and the processing priority is high, etc.),
The information indicated by the first backup data stored by the storage means is not notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed by the pachinko gaming machine 1), but the storage means. The information indicated by the second backup data stored in the machine can be notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1).
further,
Detection means that can detect the movement of the player (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.) and
Specific display means (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.) capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display, and
A promotion effect execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display) capable of executing a promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player, and
An operation effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the effect processing during variable display) capable of executing an operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means.
It is provided with a predetermined effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS049 of the variable display effect process) that can execute a predetermined effect during execution of the variable display.
The specific display means displays the specific display by any one of a plurality of display modes (for example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, red display using the display image 87AKC4). It is possible and
The promotion effect executing means is any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by
The predetermined effect executing means is any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including a predetermined mode (for example, a message of "extreme heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3). The predetermined effect can be executed by
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, the predetermined effect is executed at a different ratio according to the predetermined mode (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-12).
The promotion effect is executed in different proportions according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (see, for example, 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-13).
The advantageous state is controlled at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (see, for example, 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIG. 32-13).

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
Information indicated by the second backup data (for example, log information indicated by store confirmation data) can be displayed on the display means (for example, image display device 5) based on the second backup data stored by the storage means. A display control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 120) is provided.
The information indicated by the first backup data stored by the storage means (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data) is not displayed on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed. Not displayed on pachinko game machine 1 etc.),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
The storage means
A first storage area (for example, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003) to which the first backup data is written and the second backup data is not written.
A second storage area (for example, a second backup storage unit 95AK004) in which the second backup data is written and the first backup data is not written is provided.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
The first storage area is a storage area of a first number (for example, three) in which the same first backup data is written (for example, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.). Have,
The second storage area has a second number (eg, one) of storage areas (eg, second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) that is less than the first number in which the same second backup data is written.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
With the first control means (for example, main board 11)
A second control means (for example, a microcomputer 120 for effect control), which is the control means, is provided.
When only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means is reset, the second control means executes the first backup process and executes the second backup process. No (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in step 95AKS112, but the store confirmation data is not backed up).
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed.

(6) In the game machine of (5) above
The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when both the first control means and the second control means are reset (for example, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107). ),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed.

(7) In the game machine of (5) or (6) above
When the voltage supplied to the second control means is equal to or less than a predetermined value, a signal supply means (for example, electric power) capable of supplying a predetermined signal (for example, a power failure signal) that does not cause the second control means to operate. Equipped with a disconnection detection circuit 95AK010, etc.)
In the second control means, after the power is turned on, whether both the first control means and the second control means are reset based on whether or not the predetermined signal is supplied or not. It is possible to identify whether only has been reset (for example, processing after 95AKS104).
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions related to the following gaming machines (8) to (15). Conventionally, in a game machine, when a player operates a button during an operation valid period as shown in JP-A-2017-164504, if the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the mode of display or production. There was something to do. In such a game machine, the degree of expectation of a big hit only differs depending on the display and the mode of the production when the player operates it, and it is difficult to appropriately raise the expectation of the player by the production. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine that appropriately raises the expectation of the player by directing and enhances the game entertainment.

The game machine of (8) is
A detection means (for example, a stick) that is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player and can detect the movement of the player. A controller 31A, a controller sensor unit 35A, etc.), a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, an active display area 87AKA1, a first hold display area 87AKB1, a second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.), and a game. The motion effect is executed based on the promotion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the variable display effect process) and the detection result of the detection means. Possible operation effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process) and the predetermined effect execution means (for example, the variable display effect process) that can execute the predetermined effect while the variable display is being executed. The specific display means includes a plurality of display modes (for example, display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of (corresponding display colors, etc.), and the promotion effect executing means includes a plurality of effect modes (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). For example, the promotion effect can be executed by any one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 (such as the size of the V-con display), and the predetermined effect execution means is a “super heat” using a predetermined mode (for example, the display image 87AKE3). The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including the message "!!"), and the predetermined effect can be executed according to the display mode of the specific display. The predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined mode at different ratios (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-12), and the promotion is performed by the special mode at different rates depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect. The effect is executed (see, for example, 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-13), and is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, FIG. Promotion effect according to the variable display result in 32-13 87AK51).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(9) In the gaming machine of the above (8), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect execution means. May be feasible (see, eg, FIG. 32-9 (B3)).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(10) In the game machine according to (8) or (9), the specific display is displayed in response to the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, at the time of the second timing cut-in effect in FIG. 32-9 (B3)). It may be possible to change the display mode.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(11) In any of the game machines (8) to (10) above, depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed (for example, the display image 87AKE1 in the cut-in effect determination example 87AK41). It may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display at different rates (such as when it is determined to be any of ~ 87AKE3).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11), the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific mode before the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined effect executing means. (For example, when the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22), it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(13) In any of the game machines (8) to (12) above, a setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, FIG. 31-6). The specific display may be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(14) In any of the game machines (8) to (13) above, a setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, FIG. 31-6). The predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

(15) In any of the game machines (8) to (14) above, a setting means that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (for example, FIG. 31-6). The promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the set value change process of step S6A in the above. 32-16, a determination example of the promotion effect 87AK61, etc.).
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows various circuits mounted on the production control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of a backup memory board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main process, and the figure which shows the process priority. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the CPU exception event occurrence processing and the example of the VDP error interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt process for effect control. It is a figure which shows the content example of the production control command for a game. It is a figure which shows the content example of the production control command which becomes a test command. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the reception order of a test command, and the processing to execute. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the backup control table. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays the maintenance history screen. It is a figure which shows the specific example which displays the maintenance history screen. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 41AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 42AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 43AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 44AK. It is explanatory drawing of the feature part 45AK. It is explanatory drawing of the backup storage part in the feature part 95AK, the manufacturer confirmation data and store confirmation data as backup data. It is a flowchart of the backup process in the feature part 95AK. It is a block diagram of the effect control microcomputer and the power failure detection circuit in the feature part 95AK. It is a timing chart which shows the state when the pachinko machine is reset. This is a timing chart showing the state when the effect control microcomputer is reset. It is a flowchart at the time of power-on of the effect control microcomputer in the feature part 95AK. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure date and time recording processing in the modification of the feature part 95AK. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time in the modification of the feature part 95AK. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 1st special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a figure which shows the numerical value range corresponding to 2nd special drawing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination example. It is a figure which shows the active display example and suggestion effect example. It is a figure which shows the cut-in effect example and the promotion effect example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the final display image. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the change pattern. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the change pattern. It is a figure which shows the decision example about the suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the cut-in effect. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on a feature part 87AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on a feature part 88AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which concerns on a feature part 89AK. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the promotion effect which becomes a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example. It is a figure which shows the production execution example.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2 and a gaming machine frame 3. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame that rotatably supports the gaming machine frame 3. The game board 2 is a gauge board that constitutes the game board surface. The game machine frame 3 is an underframe for fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a game area surrounded by a guide rail or the like. The game ball (game medium) launched from the launcher passes through the launch passage and is driven into the game area. A glass door frame having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, an image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, A normal symbol display 20, a first hold display 25A, a second hold display 25B, a normal figure hold display 25C, a passing gate 41, and the like are provided. In addition, the surface of the game board in the game area may be provided with a windmill, a large number of obstacle nails, a general winning opening, an out opening, and the like. A game effect lamp 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3.

A ball striking operation handle (operation knob) is provided at the lower right position of the game machine frame 3. The hitting ball operation handle is operated by a player or the like in order to launch the game ball toward the game area, and the elastic force of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount). At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, an upper plate (striking ball supply plate) for holding (storing) game balls and a lower plate (surplus) for holding (storing) surplus balls from the upper plate. A ball storage dish) is provided. A stick controller 31A is attached to the member forming the lower plate, and a push button 31B is provided to the member forming the upper plate.

On the screens of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the image display device 5, and the like, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed. These variable displays are based on the occurrence of the first starting prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6A, or in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It becomes feasible based on the occurrence of the second start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the formed second start prize opening. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is configured by using, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and is identified in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (special symbol), which is information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). The image display device 5 is configured by using, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special symbol game and the special symbol (first special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to each of the variable display of 2 special symbols or the 2nd special symbol), the decorative symbol which is the identification information (decorative identification information) is variable in the decorative symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display units such as three. Is displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game. As an example, on the screen of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged.

A hold storage display area 5H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. In the hold storage display area 5H, a hold display for identifiablely displaying the number of holds (the number of holds for special figures) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The hold display may be any display that can be displayed in correspondence with the hold storage of information related to the variable display. Hold display may be performed together with the hold storage display area 5H or instead of the hold storage display area 5H by using the first hold display 25A and the second hold display 25B.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing configuration examples of various substrates and peripheral devices. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a lamp output board 13, a backup memory board 14, and an effect data memory board 16 as shown in FIG. In addition, a relay board 15, a relay board 17 for effect control, an audio output board 18, a driver board 19, and the like are also mounted. Further, various boards such as a power supply board, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and the like may be mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components are mounted, but also electric components are mounted (mounted) on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including an electronic circuit mounting board configured as described above.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that electric power from an AC power source, which is an external power source (commercial power source), can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board. Has been done. The power supply board includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have. The power supply voltage generated by the power supply board may be supplied to the main board 11 or the effect control board 12 via the drawer relay board.

A game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. On the main board 11, signals captured from various detection switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted via a switch circuit 110. It is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The gate switch 21 detects a game ball (gate passing ball) that has passed through the passing gate 41. Based on the detection of the gate passing sphere by the gate switch 21, the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 becomes feasible. The first start opening switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A. The second start opening switch 22B detects a game ball that has passed (entered) at the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B. The count switch 23 detects a passing (entering) game ball at the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. When a game ball that has passed through various winning openings such as the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening is detected, the number of winning balls is determined in advance corresponding to each winning opening. The game ball as is paid out.

On the main board 11, the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is transmitted to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door via the solenoid circuit 111. The solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory has a state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (or a state in which it does not pass) and a state in which it is easy to pass (or a state in which it passes) through the second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. Make it changeable. The solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door makes the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 changeable between a state in which the game ball cannot pass and a state in which the game ball can pass. From the main board 11, a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like is transmitted.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a RAM 102 that provides a work area for game control. , A CPU 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. Be prepared. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. In the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game are set by, for example, a random number circuit 104 or a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The indicated numerical data is counted (generated) so that it can be updated. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The main board 11 has a setting key 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) in the setting change state. The changeover switch 52 is connected. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be installed at a predetermined position on the main board 11, or may be mounted outside the main board 11 such as a predetermined position on the power supply board. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate it. Since the setting key 51 requires a key operation, only the staff having the key for operating the setting key 51 can operate the setting key 51 among the staff in the amusement park. The setting key 51 is a switch that can be switched on and off by a predetermined key operation, and is also a switch that can execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation).

Various sensors such as a door opening sensor 90 that detects the opening of the glass door frame that covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable are connected to the main board 11, and are based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to judge the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors). A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the game machine frame 3 open.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (first winning opening, second major winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, general winning opening, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the game is totaled, and various winning information such as the continuous ratio and the winning ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 29. By displaying such prize information, it is possible to confirm various prize information such as the continuous ratio and the role ratio after the installation in the amusement park. On the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not adjustments have been made, what kind of adjustments have been made, and as a result of the adjustments, the game balls enter the general winning opening as often as designed. It is confirmed (verified) whether it is. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence / absence and contents of adjustment after installation.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, and 8R are based on the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. , Game effect lamp 9, effect motor 60, effect LED 61, and other effect devices, and various circuits for controlling the effect operation by various effect electric parts are mounted. The effect control board 12 includes an image display on the image display device 5, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting on the light emitting members constituting the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED 61, and an effect motor 60 for moving the effect movable member. It is equipped with a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation, such as the drive operation of the. The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is equipped with electronic components such as an effect control microcomputer 120, an external ROM 121, and an external RAM 121.

The effect control board 12 is backed up with wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting an illumination signal to the lamp output board 13, and a backup memory board 14. Wiring for transmitting the control signal and the like, wiring for transmitting the effect data signal to and from the effect data memory board 16, and the like are connected. Wiring for transmitting various signals to the audio output board 18 and the driver board 19 is also connected via the effect control relay board 17. The information signal transmitted to the audio output board 18 may include an audio signal (sound effect signal) that specifies the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 19 may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the effect moving member by driving the effect motor 60. The information signal transmitted to the driver board 19 may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the effect LED 61. Wiring for receiving the operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 12. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the player's motion using the stick controller 31A has been detected. The motion detection signal may include a detection signal indicating that the player's motion using the push button 31B has been detected.

The lamp output board 13 is a board for lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is a driver IC or the like that supplies a drive current to the game effect lamp 9 or the like according to an illumination signal from the effect control board 12. Is installed. The backup memory board 14 is a board for storing backup data provided separately from the effect control board 12, and can execute backup data writing processing and reading processing according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 12. It is configured. In the backup data writing process, the backup data is written and stored in the backup data memory. In the backup data reading process, the backup data stored in the backup data memory is read and transmitted to the effect control board 12 or the like. The effect data memory board 16 is a board for storing effect data provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is configured to be capable of executing the effect data reading process according to the effect data control signal from the effect control board 12. ing. In the effect data reading process, the effect data stored in the effect data memory is read out and transmitted to the effect control board 12 or the like. The effect data memory board 16 is equipped with an effect data memory capable of storing the effect data. The effect data memory includes a storage area for storing various image data indicating the display image in the image display device 5, a storage area for storing various audio data indicating the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect motor 60. A storage area for storing various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the above, a storage area for storing various light emission data indicating the lighting control contents of the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED 61, and the like may be provided in advance. The effect data memory may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory such as a NAND memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any of the above may be used.

The effect control relay board 17 is installed on a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 2, and relays various signals transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the audio output board 18 and the driver board 19. The back pack may be attached to a central portion on the back surface side of the game board 2, and an opening facing the image display device 5 may be formed in the center thereof. The back pack may be provided so as to cover a part or all of the main board 11, the lamp output board 13, the audio output board 18, and the driver board 19 from the rear. An effect control board box containing a part or all of the effect control board 12, the backup memory board 14, and the effect data memory board 16 may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack. The main board 11 may be housed in a board case together with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52 that can be operated by a staff member of a game hall or the like. In this case, the display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 arranged on the main board 11 may also be housed in the board case. The setting key 51, the setting changeover switch 52, and the display changeover switch 30 may be exposed through an opening formed on the back surface of the board case so that the setting key 51, the setting changeover switch 52, and the display changeover switch 30 can be operated without opening the board case. The audio output board 18 is a board for audio output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is for outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, which are sound output devices, according to the sound signal from the effect control board 12. Various circuits are installed. The driver board 19 is a board for drive control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the information signal from the effect control board 12, the drive signal of the effect motor 60 and the lighting signal of the effect LED 61 are transmitted. The driver IC to be supplied is installed.

A security cover may be attached to cover the board case containing the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. With the gaming machine frame 3 closed, the board case containing the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is covered with a security cover from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 become inoperable when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. When the game machine frame 3 is open, the security cover may be separated from the board case to allow the operation of the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. Further, by covering the board case including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 with the security cover, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being operated from the inside of the game island on which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command may include a display control command. The display control command is used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5. The effect control command may include a voice control command. The voice control command is used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect control command may include a lighting control command. The lighting control command is used to control the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED 61. The movable control command is used for controlling the operation of the movable member for effect by the driving force of the effect motor 60. Each of these commands may separately constitute an effect control command, or some or all combinations may form an effect control command.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105. The random number circuit 104 is not limited to the one built in the game control microcomputer 100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 is configured with table data that constitutes a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals that are various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored.

FIG. 3 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12. Some or all of the electronic components such as the effect control microcomputer 120, the external ROM 121, and the external RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 can be attached and detached by inserting and removing the connector pins from the connector sockets. It may be attached, and other components may be attached so as to be mountable by soldering or the like. On the effect control board 12, connectors 150 to 156 are mounted together with these electronic components. The effect control microcomputer 120 includes a CPU 131, an internal ROM 132, an internal RAM 133, a watchdog timer 134, a timer circuit 135, an interrupt controller 136, a serial communication circuit 137, a clock circuit 138, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 140, and an audio processing circuit. It is configured to include a plurality of electronic components such as 141, a lamp control circuit 142, and a motor control circuit 143. The effect control microcomputer 120 may be any effect control microprocessor that integrates these electronic components. The CPU 131 executes control processing according to a computer program for effect control. The internal ROM 132 fixedly stores a basic program of control processing executed by the CPU 131, such as firmware, and system setting data unique to the effect control microcomputer 120. The internal RAM 133 provides a work area for the CPU 131. The watchdog timer 134 has a counter circuit that counts up or down based on the setting of the built-in register, and when the measurement time elapses from the monitoring time (timeout time) and a timeout occurs, a timeout that becomes a time-lapse signal. Generate a signal. The CPU 131 periodically clears and restarts the watchdog timer 134. When the processing of the CPU 131 is delayed due to some kind of failure and the watchdog timer 134 cannot be cleared and the measurement time elapses, a timeout signal is generated and the processing by the CPU 131 is reset.

The timer circuit 135 is configured by incorporating, for example, an 8-bit programmable counter (CH0 to CH3) in 4 channels, and is a circuit capable of generating real-time interrupts and measuring time. In the timer circuit 135, the countdown is started at a predetermined cycle from the count initial value set in advance for each channel, and when there is a channel whose count value becomes "00", the interrupt flag corresponding to that channel is set to the on state. To do. At this time, if the interrupt is permitted, the timer circuit 135 generates an interrupt request to the CPU 131 by the interrupt controller 136. The timer circuit 135 may have a function as an RTC (Real Time Clock). The RTC can measure the current date and time and output date and time information including date information and time information.

The interrupt controller 136 is a circuit capable of controlling various interrupt requests generated by the effect control microcomputer 120. The interrupts controlled by the interrupt controller 136 include multiple types of interrupts, such as X-class interrupts (XIRQ), I-class interrupts (IRQ), software interrupts (SWI), and illegal opcode traps (ILGOP). You may. The interrupt controller 136 includes an interrupt control register for setting the permission / rejection of interrupt and the priority of interrupt for each type of interrupt. For example, the interrupt controller 136 may be provided with interrupt control registers corresponding to various interrupts, such as for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V-sync interrupt setting. The V-sync interrupt is an interrupt that matches the timing at which a vertical synchronization signal is output from the VDP 140 that draws an effect image or the like on the image display device 5. In the interrupt control register corresponding to each interrupt, internal information data (interrupt permission / rejection data) indicating the approval / disapproval of the corresponding interrupt and internal information data (interrupt priority) indicating the priority of the corresponding interrupt are stored. Data) and can be set. For example, if the value of the interrupt permission / rejection data is "0", the corresponding interrupt is set to the permitted state, and if the value of the interrupt permission / rejection data is "1", the corresponding interrupt is prohibited. Set to state. The interrupt priority is set by, for example, 16 steps (4 bits) of numerical values according to the interrupt priority data, and the interrupt priority corresponding to the case of "0000 (= 0H)" is the highest, and "1111". The priority of the interrupt corresponding to the case of "(= FH)" is the lowest. Not limited to interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V-sync interrupt setting, for example, external interrupt, serial transmission interrupt, interrupt by random number acquisition of random number circuit, etc. , An interrupt control register may be provided corresponding to any interrupt related to the control of the effect.

The internal information data set in the interrupt control register is set in advance in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the internal ROM 132. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 sets the serial communication circuit 137, random number generation, internal reset operation, and the like according to the setting contents of the program management area and the like. At this time, the internal information data of the interrupt control register corresponding to various interrupts such as the serial reception interrupt setting, the timer interrupt setting, and the V-sync interrupt setting provided in the interrupt controller 136 is set. As a result, settings such as serial reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V-sync interrupt are made. For example, in the interrupt control registers for serial reception interrupt setting, timer interrupt setting, and V-sync interrupt setting, the interrupt permission / rejection data among the internal information data all show a value of "0" and are serial. The reception interrupt, timer interrupt, and V-sync interrupt are all set to the permitted state. In addition, as for the interrupt priority data of the internal information data, the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the timer interrupt, and the timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V-sync interrupt. A 4-bit value corresponding to each is set in. A reset controller may be provided inside or outside the interrupt controller 136. The reset controller controls various resets that occur in the effect control microcomputer 120. Reset Controller-controlled resets include system resets and user resets. The system reset occurs when a low-level signal is input to the SRST terminal for a certain period of time. For user reset, when a low-level signal is input to the URST terminal for a certain period of time, a timeout signal of the watchdog timer 134 occurs, an out-of-designated travel prohibition (IAT) signal occurs, an interval reset signal is output. It occurs due to a predetermined user reset factor, such as when it occurs.

The serial communication circuit 137 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from various boards and circuits other than the effect control board 12 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 137 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a plurality of types of serial communication standards such as UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter), SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit). The serial communication circuit 137 may include a plurality of communication processing units including a receiving unit, a transmitting unit, a communication control unit, a serial communication data register, a serial status register, a serial control register, and the like. UART is a pace-synchronized serial communication standard that transfers communication data using a start bit and a stop bit. In this case, the clock signal line is unnecessary, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively low. SPI and I2C are clock-synchronous serial communication standards, and transfer communication data using clock signals. In this case, a clock signal line is required, but the communication speed (baud rate) is relatively high. In the case of SPI, signal lines corresponding to each of a clock signal, a transmission data signal, a reception data signal, and a slave selection signal are provided. In the case of I2C, a signal line corresponding to each of the clock signal and the data signal is provided. The plurality of communication processing units included in the serial communication circuit 137 may have different hardware configurations according to the plurality of types of serial communication standards. The clock circuit 138 is a circuit that generates a clock signal to be supplied to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 120, such as the CPU 131 and the VDP 140. For example, the clock circuit divides the external clock input to the clock input terminal to generate an internal system clock signal, and supplies the internal system clock signal to each circuit of the effect control microcomputer 120.

The VDP 140 determines the control content of the image display in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the CPU 131, the register setting, and the like. For example, the VDP 140 controls for executing variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The VDP140 is an image processor having image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function, a moving image data separation function, and a video decoding function. The VDP 140 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The voice processing circuit 141 can generate a voice signal used for voice output by the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and register settings from the CPU 131 and VDP 140. The lamp control circuit 142 can generate an illumination signal according to a lighting mode (light emitting mode) such as lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 or an effect LED 61. The motor control circuit 143 can generate a drive control signal used to drive the effect motor 60.

The external ROM 121 contains, as specific contents of the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 120, various data constituting an instruction code, management data, table data, effect control pattern, etc. that constitute a system program or a user program executed by the CPU 131. Is fixedly memorized. The external RAM 122 temporarily stores various data and the like as an auxiliary area of the internal RAM 133. The connectors 150 to 156 are configured by using, for example, a receptacle, and have a configuration of a wiring connection device capable of detachably connecting various signal wirings. The connectors 150 to 156 make it possible to output various signals via different paths such as wiring patterns different from each other on the effect control board 12. The connector 150 is a connector port for main board wiring that can connect the main board wiring that is electrically connected to the main board 11. The connector 151 is a connector port for power supply wiring to which a power supply wiring electrically connected to a power supply unit such as a power supply board can be connected. The connector 152 is a connector port for the effect relay wiring capable of connecting the effect relay wiring electrically connected to the effect relay unit such as the effect control relay board 17. The connector 153 is a connector port for frame lamp wiring that can connect the frame lamp wiring that is electrically connected to the lamp output board 13 and the frame lamp portion provided with a part or all of the game effect lamp 9. is there. The connector 154 is a connector port for backup wiring to which a backup wiring electrically connected to a backup unit such as a backup memory board 14 can be connected. The connector 155 is a connector port for effect data wiring capable of connecting the effect data wiring electrically connected to the effect data unit such as the effect data memory board 16. The connector 156 is a connector port for inspection wiring that can connect inspection wiring that is electrically connected to an information processing device (personal computer or the like) for inspection, testing, or development. The information processing device for inspection may function as an inspection device for the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing, for example, a specific software program. In this way, the connector 156 becomes an electronic component used as a connecting member to which the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected.

The connector 156 enables the inspection wiring to be connected at the trial production stage, the development stage, or the manufacturing stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, and the effect control microcomputer 120 is shipped in response to a test command different from the effect control command. The previous inspection process may be made executable. The pre-shipment inspection process includes, for example, internal parameters and input / output signals when the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a part or all of the program code before the completion of the software program during trial production or development. It may include verifiable processing. The verification environment in which the inspection process is executed before shipment may be, for example, an execution environment corresponding to the state in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed on the game machine installation island, or the pachinko game machine 1 is independently used as a personal computer. It may be an execution environment in which the operating status can be confirmed by connecting to an information processing device such as. Further, the connector 156 may be able to connect the inspection wiring at the collection stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, so that the backup data can be read out according to a test command different from the effect control command. Good. Alternatively, the connector 156 may be removed, for example, at the shipping stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, the connector 156 is mounted only on a predetermined model such as a demonstration machine or a test machine other than the model in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and is mass-produced and installed in the game hall (mass production machine). It may not be installed. A land on which the connector 156 can be mounted may be formed on the surface of the effect control board 12. When the connector 156 is removed or not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the connector 156 is no longer mounted may be soldered. The soldering process is a process of applying solder to the exposed portion of the copper foil pattern, and may be performed by, for example, a cream solder printing machine or an arbitrary method that does not use a cream solder printing machine. .. Depending on whether the connector 156 is mounted or not, the soldering process in the same process may be performed, or the soldering process in different processes may be performed. When the soldering process in the same process is performed, it is not necessary to produce a plurality of patterns of metal masks used in the cream solder printing machine for applying solder to the lands, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the cost required for substrate production. By soldering unmounted lands such as the connector 156 where electronic components are not mounted, oxidation of the copper foil pattern is prevented, problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern are prevented, and the quality of the board is maintained appropriately. be able to.

When the electronic component such as the connector 156 is not mounted, the copper foil pattern of the land on which the electronic component is not mounted is not limited to the one coated by soldering, and for example, a resist which is an insulating film is applied. It may be coated. By covering the land on which electronic components are not mounted by any method in this way, it is possible to prevent oxidation of the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as disconnection due to corrosion of the wiring pattern, and maintain appropriate board quality. I hope I can. On the other hand, the land on which the electronic component is not mounted may not be covered by soldering or the like. For example, when the land is soldered, the solder as a conductor adheres to the copper foil pattern, which may cause an unintended short circuit or current path in the wiring pattern. Therefore, for lands on which electronic components are not mounted, soldering is not performed to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and appropriately improve the quality of the board. Can be maintained. By performing an insulating coating treatment instead of the solder treatment, it is possible to prevent solder from adhering to the copper foil pattern, prevent problems such as short circuits in the wiring pattern and changes in the current path, and maintain appropriate substrate quality. You may do so.

FIG. 4A shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the backup memory board 14. The backup memory board 14 is provided with a memory controller 200, an RTC 201, a serial communication circuit 202, an inspection connection portion 203, backup data memories 210A to 210D, and a connector 220. As described above, the backup memory board 14 is provided with backup data memories 210A to 210D as a plurality of backup data storage units. The memory controller 200 can execute backup data writing processing and reading processing according to the backup control signal from the effect control board 12. The RTC 201 can measure the current date and time and supply date and time information including date information and time information to the memory controller 200. The serial communication circuit 202 is a circuit capable of transmitting and receiving communication data to and from the effect control board 12 by a serial communication method. The serial communication circuit 202 may be capable of transmitting and receiving communication data corresponding to a specific serial communication standard such as SPI. The serial communication circuit 202 may include a communication processing unit having a hardware configuration corresponding to such a specific serial communication standard. The inspection connection portion 203 may be formed as a specific conductor portion including terminals capable of inputting and outputting inspection signals, such as a test point. When the inspection connection unit 203 is the test point, the test probe is brought into contact with the inspection connection unit 203, and the inspection signal is input / output between the inspection device and the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12. Or, it suffices if the backup data can be read. The inspection connection unit 203 inputs an inspection signal between the inspection device and the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 or the backup data memories 210A to 210D without going through the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12. It may be possible to output and read backup data. In this way, the inspection connection unit 203 can provide an interface for data communication with the inspection device serving as an external device on the backup memory board 14.

The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured by using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) (Ferroelectric RAM), and part or all of them may be a SRAM (Static RAM) with a battery. May be configured using. The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be partially or wholly configured by using a flash memory such as a NAND-ROM, an EEPROM, or an HDD (Hard Disk Drive). The non-volatile ferroelectric memory called FRAM (registered trademark) has a memory cell using a ferroelectric film as a capacitor insulating film, and is a memory written in the memory cell even when the operating power is turned off. No data is lost. The configuration using FRAM (registered trademark) does not require battery backup for data retention, and has high speed writing, high number of rewrites, and low power consumption as compared with non-volatile memory such as flash memory, EEPROM, and HDD. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the installation area, simplify the device configuration, improve the operation efficiency, and appropriately store and store the backup data. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to dispose of the battery, the disappearance of the stored contents due to the replacement of the battery is prevented, and the backup data can be appropriately stored and stored. The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be backed up by a backup power supply mounted on the power supply board. As described above, the backup data memories 210A to 210D can retain the stored contents even when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. The backup data memories 210A to 210D may be able to retain the stored contents without using a backup power supply, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). Alternatively, the backup data memories 210A to 210B may be able to hold the stored contents by using a backup power source, for example, when a part or all of them are configured by using the SRAM with a battery.

The backup memory board 14 stores and stores various log information in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D by using the date and time information output by the RTC201. The memory controller 200 can execute a storage data writing process and a reading process for the backup data memories 210A to 210D in response to an instruction or an instruction sent from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12. In this case, by executing the writing process and the reading process of the stored data indicating the log information including the date and time information, the operation history, the setting history, and the operation history and the setting history of the plurality of electronic components used for the game and the production in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It suffices if the error history can be stored so that it can be verified after the fact.

FIG. 4B shows a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14. The effect control board 12 includes a connector 154 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14. The backup memory board 14 includes a connector 220 that can be attached to and detached from the connector 154 of the effect control board 12. By connecting the connector 154 and the connector 220, the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 can be physically and electrically connected. The connector 154 provided on the effect control board 12 includes terminals TM01 to TM06. The connector 220 provided on the backup memory board 14 includes terminals TM11 to TM16. The terminals TM01 to TM06 included in the connector 154 and the terminals TM11 to TM16 included in the connector 220 have the corresponding terminals (for example, the terminals TM01 and the terminal TM11) physically and electrically when the connector 154 and the connector 220 are combined. Any relationship may be used as long as it is connected to.

The terminal TM01 included in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 can provide a specific voltage such as VD1. The terminal TM02 included in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 can receive VD1 of a specific voltage used for confirming the connection with the backup memory board 14. For example, the specific voltage VD1 output from the terminal TM01 included in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 is supplied to the terminal TM11 included in the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14. The terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 220 may be short-circuited on the substrate of the backup memory substrate 14. Therefore, when the connector 154 and the connector 220 are coupled, the voltage corresponding to VD1 is supplied from the terminal TM12 of the connector 220 on the backup board 14 to the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 on the effect control board 12. To. On the other hand, when the connector 154 and the connector 220 are not connected and are not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 on the effect control board 12.

In the effect control board 12, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 determines the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 in order to confirm the connection state with the backup memory board 14. In this case, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a high voltage value corresponding to VD1, it can be determined that the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 are connected (connected state). On the other hand, if the voltage value of the terminal TM02 is a low voltage value corresponding to the non-supply of voltage, it can be determined that the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 are not connected (not connected state). In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM02 which is the connection confirmation member. The connection state is not limited to the one that confirms the connection state based on the terminal voltage, and may be, for example, the one that confirms the connection state based on the input state of a specific signal. Alternatively, a switch or a sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

The terminals TM03 to TM06 included in the connector 154 of the effect control board 12 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 137 included in the effect control microcomputer 120. The terminals TM13 and TM14 included in the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 are wired and connected to the serial communication circuit 202. Therefore, the wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the connector 220 is connected to the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board via the serial communication circuit 137 and the serial communication circuit 202. An electrical connection is provided so that the stored data can be transferred between the 14 backup data memories 210A to 210D. The terminals TM15 and TM16 included in the connector 220 of the backup memory board 14 are wired and connected to the inspection connection portion 203. As a result, the wiring connected to the terminals TM05 and TM06 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM15 and TM16 of the connector 220 is for inspection of the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board 14 via the serial communication circuit 137. An electrical connection is provided so that the inspection signal can be transmitted and received and the stored data can be transferred to and from the connection unit 203.

The backup memory board 14 is configured to be detachable from the effect control board 12. As a result, for example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that does not use the backup data memories 210A to 210D, the backup memory board 14 can be removed to increase the flexibility of the device configuration and increase the manufacturing cost. Can be prevented. Further, since the backup memory board 14 can be removed to read and analyze the stored data, the work load of inspecting the stored data can be reduced. The RTC included in the timer circuit 135 of the effect control microcomputer 120 provided on the effect control board 12 may provide the current time for timing adjustment for executing the effect in which a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are linked, for example. Yes, relatively high precision is required. On the other hand, the RTC201 of the backup memory board 14 only needs to be able to specify the context of the storage processing executed for the backup data memories 210A to 210D, and therefore, a relatively low-precision one is sufficient to satisfy the application. Can be done. As described above, since the RTC201 of the backup memory substrate 14 may have a relatively low accuracy, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost. The configuration and functions of the backup memory board 14 may be configured to be provided by the effect control board 12. For example, the configurations and functions of the backup data memories 210A to 210D may be realized by the external RAM 122. Even in this case, for example, the wiring pattern on the effect control board 12, or the switch or sensor may be used as a connection confirmation member to confirm the connection state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined ball hitting operation handle provided at a lower right position of a game machine frame 3 in the pachinko game machine 1 is determined based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) by the player. A gaming ball as a gaming medium is launched toward the gaming area by a launching motor or the like provided in the hitting ball launching device. When a game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) various winning openings, the game ball as a prize ball is paid out. For example, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game can be executed by the normal symbol display 20. In the normal symbol game, when the normal symbol is variablely displayed and a specific normal symbol that is the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol hit". When the normal symbol is variablely displayed and the normal symbol, which is a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol, is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In the case of "normal drawing hit", the opening control is performed so that the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened in a predetermined period, and the second starting winning opening is opened. When the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A, the first starting winning is generated. When the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting winning is generated. Variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols becomes feasible based on the occurrence of the first start prize and the second start prize. The special symbol includes a symbol that is out of alignment with the jackpot symbol, and the variable display result is "big hit" when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), and the variable display result is when the missed symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Becomes a "loss". When the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", the big winning opening is opened and the game ball can easily pass (enter), which is an advantageous state for the player. It becomes a big hit game state.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10").

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11. In the game control main process, interrupt prohibition is set (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

After the initial setting, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear switch is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. The clear switch is mounted on a power supply board, for example, and when the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, the on state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If such a clear signal is not input, it may be determined in step S3 that the clear switch is off. The backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S3, it may be determined whether or not the backup flag is on, and if it is on, it may be determined that there is backup data. It is determined whether or not the backup data saved in this way matches when the power supply is stopped and when the power supply is restarted, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If they match, it may be determined in step S3 that the backup RAM is normal.

When the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) and the setting confirmation process (step S5) are executed. In the recovery process of step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, when the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, it is sufficient that the change of the special symbol can be restarted from the state before the restoration. If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) and the setting change process (step S7) are executed. In the initialization process of step S6, the RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102 is performed, and the initial values are set in the work area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. For example, the setting confirmation condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on at the start of the power supply in which the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed. It holds when both are satisfied. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied, and the setting confirmation process is terminated. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear switch is off are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear switch is off, the fact that the clear switch is off can also be included in the setting confirmation condition. In the setting confirmation process of step S5, when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the out-of-game symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the out-of-game symbol is displayed. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the game stop state associated therewith is terminated, and the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. For example, the setting change condition is that the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on at the start of the power supply in which the setting change process of step S7 is executed. It holds when both are satisfied. Further, the setting change condition may include that the clear switch is on. In the setting change process of step S7, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off, the setting key 51 is off, or the clear switch is off, the setting change condition is satisfied. It is determined that there was no setting, and the setting change process is terminated. When the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on, the setting key 51 is on, and the clear switch is on, it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied. .. When the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting change start command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. .. When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. For example, every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the set value is updated as "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "1"-> ... After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. As a result, the staff of the amusement park or the like is notified that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. When the setting change state is terminated, the game stop state associated therewith is terminated, and the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as an effect LED 61 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, based on the detection of the action of pressing the operation button for production such as the push button 31B, "maintenance mode" etc. is displayed and the mode shifts to the maintenance mode. It may be configured. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting in the RTC of the timer circuit 135, the occurrence history of various errors (recording when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the set value was changed). This mode allows you to check the record of the changed setting value). When the setting key 51 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode may also be terminated.

In this way, when the setting key 51 is turned on when the power is turned on (in addition, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 90 is turned on), if the clear switch is turned on, step S7 is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4, and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. On the other hand, when the setting key 51 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed, but the setting change state is not controlled, and the clear switch is activated. If it is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process in step S5 or the setting change process in step S7, the random number circuit setting process is executed (step S8). The random number circuit setting process is a process in which numerical data indicating a game random number can be updated by initializing the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be capable of autonomously updating numerical data indicating a game random number even if the random number circuit setting process by the CPU 103 is not executed. Subsequently, the interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S9). The interrupt initial setting process is a process in which the permission / rejection and priority of interrupt can be set according to the interrupt factor generated by the game control microcomputer 100. For example, the CPU 103 may read interrupt initial setting information stored in a predetermined area (program management area, etc.) of the ROM 101, and set whether or not to allow interrupts and the priority according to the read value for each interrupt factor. .. The interrupt initial setting process includes a process of generating a periodic timer interrupt at predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.) by setting the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100. You may. After that, after setting the interrupt permission (step S10), the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. The CPU 103, which has received the interrupt request signal from the CTC and has received the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt process.

The game control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 103 may include a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. .. The switch process is a process in which the CPU 103 determines the presence or absence of detection signals received from various switches via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing for performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and making it possible to generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output processing includes, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times a jackpot has occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start prizes, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a process that enables output of data such as probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times a probability change state has occurred). The game random number update process is a process that enables software to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11. The special symbol process process is a process that makes it possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. The normal symbol process processing manages the execution and hold of the normal map game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41), and the variable winning ball based on the "normal symbol hit". This is a process that makes it possible to control the opening of the device 6B. The command control process is a process that enables the effect control command set to be transmitted to be transmitted to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12.

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, first, the start winning determination process is executed. After the start winning determination process is executed, any one of the plurality of processes is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. The processes that can be selected according to the value of the special symbol process flag are special symbol normal processing, variation pattern setting processing, special symbol variation processing, special symbol stop processing, jackpot opening pre-processing, jackpot opening processing, jackpot opening post-processing, It suffices to include a part or all of the processing according to the program for game control, such as the big hit end processing, the small hit opening pre-processing, the small hit opening processing, and the small hit end processing.

In the start-up prize determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start-up prize or the second start-up prize has occurred, and if it does occur, a setting for updating the number of reserved memories is made. The hold storage number indicates the number of variable displays of special symbols and decorative symbols that have not yet been started. In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the execution of the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is regarded as a "big hit". Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the finalized special symbol in the special symbol game is set in response to the variable display result. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined based on the variable display result and the like. In the special symbol change processing, settings for changing the special symbol, settings for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change, and the like are performed. In the special symbol stop process, settings are made to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol and to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result.

In the big hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to the "big hit", and the setting for opening the big winning opening in the big hit game state is made. In the process of opening the jackpot, it is determined whether or not to return the jackpot that was opened in the jackpot game state to the closed state. In the jackpot opening post-processing, after returning the jackpot to the closed state, it is determined whether or not the number of round executions has reached the upper limit, and if not, the next round can be executed, and if it has been reached, the next round can be executed. Settings for ending the jackpot game state are made. In the jackpot end process, after waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state elapses, settings for starting probability variation control and time saving control are performed. In the small hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result corresponds to the "small hit", and settings are made to open the large winning opening in the small hit game state. In the small hit opening process, it is determined whether or not to return the large winning opening that was opened in the small hit game state to the closed state. In the small hit end process, after waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is reached. Settings are made to continue.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. In the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) can be changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of three stages from "1" to "3". "1" has the lowest ball output rate, and the larger the value in the order of "1", "2", and "3", the higher the ball output rate. .. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the larger the value is in the order of "2" and "3", the higher the advantage is stepwise. The probability of winning a small hit may be the same regardless of the set value.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the display result determination is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol (special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is subject to variable display. The case where the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2" (second), that is, the second special symbol (the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4) is the target of the variable display. A judgment value for a big hit and a judgment value for a small hit are set for each of the cases. FIG. 6A shows a display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "1", FIG. 6B shows a display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "2", and FIG. 6C shows a display result judgment table. The display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "3" is shown.

When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "1" is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If so, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, 1/32 at the time of probability change) than when the set values are "2" and "3". When the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), a part of the judgment values is set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the set value is set. When it is "1", the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". When the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot is the same as the judgment value when the variable special figure designation buffer is "1" (first). Even when the second special symbol is set and the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display (1/320 at the time of non-probability change, at the time of the probability change). Wins a big hit at 1/32). When the set value is "1" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), half of the judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits. Similar to the cases where the values are "2" and "3", the small hit is won with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "2" is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), it is higher than when the set value is "1". Win a big hit with a probability (1/300 for non-probability change, 1/30 for probability change). When the set value is "2" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. (1/300 at the time of non-probability change, 1/30 at the time of probability change) wins the big hit. When the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value "3" is used and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (first), the set values are "1" and "2". The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change). When the set value is "3" and the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2" (second), the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" (second) as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit. The same judgment value as in the case of 1) is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. (1/280 at the time of non-probability change, 1/28 at the time of probability change) to win the big hit.

The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. As a result, the winning of the big hit and the winning of the small hit are determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" here indicates the probability of becoming a big hit (ratio) and the probability of becoming a small hit (ratio). Determining whether or not to make a jackpot is to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, and the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is changed to the jackpot symbol. It is also to decide whether or not to do it. Determining whether or not to make a small hit is to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state, and the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is set to be small. It is also to decide whether or not to make a winning pattern. The winning probability of a small hit may be different depending on the set value. For example, as in the case of the big hit winning probability, the small hit winning probability may be increased as the value of the set value increases in the order of "1", "2", and "3". The setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. If the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "1" is 1/100, design the probability of winning a small hit at the set value "2" to be 1 / 93.75, and set the value "3". The winning probability of the small hit in the above may be set to 1 / 87.5. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with a small hit, a display result determination table excluding the hit determination value corresponding to the small hit may be used. A big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the big hit judgment is performed when the first special symbol is changed and the second special symbol is changed regardless of the buffer value specified by the variable special symbol. The small hit is determined by using a common table in the table, and the small hit is determined by a separate table for the case where the variable special figure specification buffer value is "1" (first) and the case where it is "2" (second). It may be done by using. It may be configured so that the order of advantage changes according to the game state. For example, it is applied to a game machine that is controlled to a high probability / high base state, maintains a high probability / high base state until the next big hit occurs, and is configured to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit is generated with a high probability of 1/2, and it may be a period in which a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, a specific gaming state (in this example, in this example). In the high probability / high base state), unlike other game states, the setting value "1", which is unlikely to cause a big hit (the high probability / high base state is easy to continue), is set to have the highest advantage. You may. When applied to a game machine whose probabilistic state ends based on the execution of a predetermined number of fluctuation displays (probability change end number) after being controlled to the probabilistic state (high probability state), the same probability change end number can be used. For example, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be increased in the order of set value "1" <set value "2" <set value "3". The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be two or four or more.

When the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit", the big hit type may be set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. May be done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided. To determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of jackpot types A to C based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit". A reference jackpot type determination table may be provided. In the jackpot type determination table, determination values may be assigned so as to make the determination ratio of the jackpot type different depending on which of "1" to "3" the set value is. For example, when the set value is "1", the percentage determined for the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is "2", the percentage determined for the jackpot type B is high, and the set value is "3". If is, the determination value may be assigned so that the ratio determined to the jackpot type A is high.

The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period in the jackpot game may be determined for each jackpot type. The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening preprocessing of the special symbol process process is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the start of the big hit game state is started. This is the period during which the fanfare effect as the effect effect to be notified is executed. The interval period is, for example, a period during which the special symbol process processing after opening the jackpot is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round of opening the jackpot on the effect control board 12 side is completed, the next This is the period during which the interval effect is executed as the effect operation for notifying the start of the round. The ending period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot end processing of the special symbol process processing is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done. As an example, the fanfare period, interval period and ending period may be set to be the longest for the jackpot type A, then the longest for the jackpot type B, and the shortest for the jackpot type C. .. If the ratio of the jackpot type C determined when the set value is "1" is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively short. If the ratio of the jackpot type A determined to be high when the set value is "3", the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The set values are configured so that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) increases in the order of "1" <"2" <"3", and at the same time, the set values are "1" <"2" <"3". The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be increased in the order of. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the game is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming too high. During the jackpot game, the jackpot suggestion effect suggesting the set value may be configured to be executable. The jackpot suggestion effect can be performed during the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the fanfare period, interval period, and ending period. In addition, by directing the player's attention to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period. In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed. Regardless of the set value, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set. One of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long period is set increases in the order of the jackpot types A <B <C. As a result, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased in the order of the set values "1" <"2" <"3".

The number of time reduction control and probability variation control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high accuracy control and time reduction control executed after the end of the jackpot game state is the jackpot game. After the end of the state, it may be continuously executed until a big hit occurs again. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state, which is a so-called consecutive villa state. In addition to or instead of the configuration so that the percentage of jackpots is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability variation continuation rate (consecutive villa rate) may be different for each set value. The number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control, and the number of controls may be different for each jackpot type, so that the advantage may be different. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more jackpot types that cannot be determined among the jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or a specific jackpot type should be 100%. It includes determining by percentage. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be different regardless of the jackpot type. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to any of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, a lottery process with a selection probability according to the set value is performed according to any of the set values "1" to "3", and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may. It suffices if the game entertainment can be improved by differently determining the jackpot type when the variable display result is "big hit" according to the set value. The jackpot type may be determined using the random number value MR1 for determining the display result. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as a special period. Using the RTC of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like, a special period may be set as long as it is in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 10:00 am to 11:00 am). The period until the first big hit may occur may be a special period. In the special period, the rate of normal reach loss is higher than in the non-special period, and even if a fluctuation pattern judgment table is used in which judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the rate of normal reach loss between the set values becomes large. Good. As a result, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), so that the motivation for playing the game in the special period is given. It is possible to enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of the special period, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than in the case of the period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the determination value of the effect determination table is assigned so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. In addition, any effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply from the power supply board is started, the effect control microcomputer 120 is activated, and the effect control main process is executed by the CPU 131. The program for executing the effect control main process may be stored in advance in one or both of the internal ROM 132 and the external ROM 121. As described above, the program for executing the effect control main process may be partially or wholly stored in the internal ROM 132 or the external ROM 121 in advance.

FIG. 7A is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process, the initialization process is executed (step S21). In the initialization process of step S21, one or both of the external RAM 122 and the internal RAM 133 are cleared to set various initial values, and the register settings of the timer circuit 135 are initialized. Following the initialization process, the initial operation control process is executed (step S22). In the initial operation control process of step S22, control for performing the initial operation of the effect movable member, such as control for driving the effect motor 60 to return the effect movable member to the initial position and control for confirming the operation, is executed. .. After the initial operation control process, information processing at power-on is executed (step S23). In the power-on information processing in step S23, the storage process of the log information including the power-on date and time may be executed. The data indicating the log information is written and stored as backup data in the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 transmits a control signal corresponding to a backup command for turning on the power to the backup memory board 14 via the serial communication circuit 137. In the backup memory board 14, the memory controller 200 responds to the backup instruction indicated by the control signal received via the serial communication circuit 202, and writes the log information including the power-on date and time using the date and time information acquired from the RTC201. The process may be executed. In the power-on information processing in step S23, the backup recovery process may be executed to restore the settings and control based on the log information stored in the log area.

After information processing at power-on, the interrupt initial setting process is executed (step S24). In the interrupt initial setting process in step S24, it is sufficient that the priority of the interrupt controlled by the interrupt controller 136 can be initially set. The interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 136 may be set in a program management area provided in one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132 based on the interrupt priority data stored in advance. For example, the priority of the interrupt is higher so that the serial reception interrupt has a higher priority than the effect control timer interrupt, and the effect control timer interrupt has a higher priority than the V-sync interrupt. Should be set. Then, after setting the interrupt permission (step S25), the loop processing is started.

FIG. 7B shows an example of setting the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120. The processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120 may be determined in advance based on the specifications of the effect control microcomputer 120 as well as the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 136. As an example, the CPU exception event occurrence processing has the highest priority, then the VDP error interrupt processing has the highest priority, and then the processing according to the interrupt priority controlled by the interrupt controller 136. The processing priority may be set in advance so as to be the priority of. The VDP error interrupt process may be executed based on the occurrence of an interrupt factor that can be controlled by the interrupt controller 136. In this case, for example, the interrupt initial setting process in step S24 may be used to set the interrupt priority so that the VDP error interrupt has the highest priority. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is a process executed by the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 when an exception event occurs due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like. The exception event of CPU 131 may occur when an undefined instruction that is not defined in the instruction set is decoded. The exception event of CPU 131 may occur when an invalid operation such as division by zero or overflow is executed. The exception event of CPU 131 may occur when a storage protection violation in virtual memory occurs. The exception event of the CPU 131 may occur in the case of a TLB (Translation Lookaside Buffer) error in which the conversion from the virtual address to the physical address becomes abnormal. The VDP error interrupt process is a process executed when an error interrupt request occurs in the VDP 140 of the effect control microcomputer 120 due to an abnormality in the internal state or the like. The error interrupt request of the VDP 140 may be generated in response to the exception event of the VDP 140, as in the case of the CPU 131. In addition, the error interrupt request of the VDP 140 may be generated when the setting of the clock signal (dot clock) used for the display control of the image display device 5 is abnormal. The error interrupt request of VDP140 may occur when the decoding error of the moving image data occurs. The error interrupt request of VDP140 may occur when the audio data is decoded abnormally. The error interrupt request of VDP140 may be generated in response to the system reset in VDP140. In this way, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the CPU 131 exception event occurs. The VDP error interrupt process is executed when an error interrupt request for VDP140 occurs. Therefore, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the CPU 131 is satisfied, the CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed. When the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the VDP 140 is satisfied, the VDP error interrupt processing is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing and the VDP error interrupt processing can be executed when the event occurrence conditions such as the CPU 131 and VDP 140 that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device and the processing device are satisfied.

FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a CPU exception event occurs. In the CPU exception event occurrence processing, first, the exception time preprocessing is executed (step S41). In the exception-time preprocessing in step S41, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of the internal RAM 133, for example. The control information for executing the instruction code may include the stored value of the program counter (PC: Program Counter) and the value of the program status word (PSW: Program Status Word). Following the exception-time pre-processing, the exception-time backup process is executed (step S42). In the exception-time backup process in step S42, the log information including the exception event information is stored. In this case, the control signal corresponding to the backup instruction for when an exception event occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 14. The backup instruction for when an exception event occurs may include exception event information that can identify the exception event that has occurred in the CPU 131. The exception event information may indicate the type of exception event in an identifiable manner. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives the backup command for when an exception event occurs, the memory controller 200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the exception event information by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC201.

After the exception-time backup process, other exception-time processes are executed (step S43). In step S43, for example, the exception handling routine may be started by accessing the vector table and jumping to the acquired exception handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 131 may be saved. If the exception event can be resolved by the exception handling routine, or if the exception event cannot be resolved and a reset occurs, the same backup process as in step S42 can be executed to resolve the exception event or resolve it. The log information when it does not exist may be memorable. When the exception-time processing is completed, the exception-time post-processing is executed (step S44), and the CPU exception event occurrence processing is terminated. In the exception-time post-processing in step S44, it is possible to return to the processing before the exception event occurred by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the CPU 131 and restoring the control information for executing the instruction code. Just do it.

FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing an example of VDP error interrupt processing. In the VDP error interrupt processing, first, the error interrupt preprocessing is executed (step S51). In the error interrupt preprocessing in step S51, for example, the control information for executing the instruction code is saved in a predetermined area (stack area or the like) of the internal RAM 133. Following the error interrupt preprocessing, the error interrupt backup process is executed (step S52). In the error interrupt backup process in step S52, the log information including the VDP error information is stored. In this case, the control signal corresponding to the backup instruction for when a VDP error occurs is transmitted to the backup memory board 14. The backup instruction for when a VDP error occurs may include VDP error information that can identify the error that occurred in the VDP 140. The VDP error information may indicate the type of VDP error identifiable. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives the backup command when a VDP error occurs, the memory controller 200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the VDP error information by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC201.

After the error interrupt backup process, other error interrupt processes are executed (step S53). In step S53, for example, depending on the interrupt factor corresponding to the VDP error, the interrupt processing routine may be branched by jumping to the acquired interrupt handler address. At this time, the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register or the like) of the CPU 131 may be saved. If the VDP 140 can autonomously execute the recovery process from the internal error, it may wait until it receives the notification of the completion of recovery or the notification of the occurrence of reset due to the inability to recover. Upon receiving these notifications, the same backup process as in step S52 may be executed to store the log information when the VDP 140 recovers from the error state or cannot recover. When the error interrupt processing is completed, the error interrupt post-processing is executed (step S54), and the VDP error interrupt processing is completed. In the post-processing at the time of error interruption in step S54, the processing before the occurrence of the VDP error can be restored by restoring the stored value of the internal register (general-purpose register, etc.) of the CPU 131 and restoring the control information for executing the instruction code. And it is sufficient.

The CPU exception event occurrence processing includes the exception time backup processing in step S42. The VDP error interrupt process includes the error interrupt backup process in step S52. In the exception time backup process in step S42, as backup data indicating log information, data including exception event information regarding the CPU 131 among a plurality of electronic components is provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. The write process for writing to the area is executed. In the backup process at the time of error interruption in step S52, data including VDP error information regarding VDP140 among a plurality of electronic components is provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 as backup data indicating log information. The write process to write to the log area is executed. The CPU exception event occurrence processing is executed when the exception event of the CPU 131 occurs, assuming that the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the CPU 131 is satisfied. The VDP error interrupt processing is executed when an error interrupt request for the VDP 140 occurs, assuming that the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the VDP 140 is satisfied. In this way, when the event occurrence condition according to the internal state of the control device or processing device such as CPU131 or VDP140 is satisfied, information about a plurality of electronic components is written in the storage area such as the log area. A writing process for storing can be executed.

After the interrupt permission is set in step S25 of the effect control main process, a timeout occurs in the predetermined channel of the timer circuit 135 every predetermined time (2 milliseconds, etc.), so that the interrupt controller 136 to the CPU 131. Then, an interrupt request signal corresponding to the timer interrupt for effect control is output. Upon receiving this interrupt request signal, the CPU 131 that has received the interrupt request starts executing the effect control timer interrupt process.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 131. In the effect control timer interrupt process, the command analysis process is executed (step S71). In the command analysis process of step S71, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect is read. Settings and controls corresponding to control commands are performed. Following the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed (step S72). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 and an effect LED 61, and an effect motor 60. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the. In addition, regarding the control content of the production operation using various production devices, various determinations related to the production can be made according to the production control command transmitted from the main board 11, the elapsed time depending on the progress of the game or the production, or the detection result. Decisions, settings, etc. are made.

Next to the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed (step S73). In the effect random number update process in step S73, at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. After the effect random number update process, the effect mode change process is executed (step S74). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled into three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and depending on which effect mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 Differently, the types of characters appearing in the advance notice production and the reach production may be different. The control for changing from the current effect mode to a different effect mode may be performed when the effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when a specific date or time is reached based on the date and time information acquired from the RTC included in the timer circuit 135, the effect mode change condition may be satisfied and the effect mode may be changed. Alternatively, the effect mode may be changed when the lottery process using the effect random numbers is executed and the effect mode change condition is satisfied according to the determination result.

Following the effect mode change process, an error notification process is executed (step S75). In the error notification process in step S75, control is performed to notify various errors that have occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The notification by such control may include a left-handed notification and a full tank notification. The left-handed notification is a notification that prompts the player to perform a left-handed operation based on, for example, the total number of times that the passing of the game ball to the passing gate provided in the right area of the game area is detected. The left-handed notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "Aim to the left!" On the image display device 5, a notification by lighting all of the game effect lamps 9, and a notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The notification by the above, or a combination of some or all of them may be included. The full tank notification is a notification that, when a full tank state of the surplus ball storage plate (lower plate) is detected, prompts the player to eliminate the full tank state based on the elapsed time during which the full tank state continues. .. The full tank notification is, for example, a notification by displaying characters such as "The lower plate is full!" On the image display device 5, a notification by lighting all the game effect lamps 9, and a notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. It may include notification by outputting the above, or a combination of some or all of them. In addition, the error notification processing is performed by displaying, lighting or emitting light, sound output, or a combination of some or all of them according to the occurrence of the error specified by the game control error specification command transmitted from the main board 11. , It suffices if the control for notifying various errors that have occurred is included. Alternatively, regardless of the game control error designation command, when it is determined that an error related to electronic components including the effect device has occurred according to the processing result of the CPU 131, display, lighting, light emission, sound output, or sound output, or A control for notifying various errors that have occurred may be performed by a combination of a part or all of them.

After the error notification process, the maintenance mode process is executed (step S76). In the maintenance mode process in step S76, control is performed so that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed. On the maintenance history screen, for example, when the setting confirmation status or the maintenance mode menu screen corresponding to the setting confirmation status is displayed, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to be operated by the staff of the amusement park is detected. Based on the result, it can be displayed when it is determined that the maintenance history selection operation has been performed. When displaying the maintenance history screen, all log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. The image display device 5 displays a maintenance history screen that includes the read log information as history information. The setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed when it is determined that the setting change / confirmation history selection operation has been performed based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B by the staff of the game hall. Become. When the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, all the setting change and setting confirmation log information is read from the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. The image display device 5 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen that includes the read setting change and setting confirmation log information as history information. Note that the maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen can be displayed even if they can be displayed based on the detection result of the operation performed by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, unlike the staff at the game hall. Good. The maintenance history screen and the setting change / confirmation history screen are screens that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot see during the game, and can be confirmed by the staff of the game hall or the person in charge at the manufacturer. Just do it.

After the maintenance mode process, the current time setting process is executed (step S77). In the current time setting process of step S77, control for setting the current date and the current time is performed. In this case, the setting information of the current date and the current time can be input based on the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B by the staff of the game hall. For example, an hour signal indicating an hour, a minute signal indicating a minute, a second signal indicating a second, a year signal indicating a year, a month signal indicating a month, a day signal indicating a day, and a day signal indicating a day of the week, which are input. The CPU 131 receives sequentially. By updating the RTC storage information in the timer circuit 135 in response to these received signals, it is sufficient that the current date and the current time settings measured by the RTC in the timer circuit 135 can be changed. By updating the stored information of the RTC201 provided on the backup memory board 14 according to the input setting information, the current date measured by the RTC201 and the setting of the current item may be changed. When the current time setting process is completed, the date and time information storage process is executed (step S78). In the date / time information storage process in step S78, control is performed in which date / time information is stored and stored in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 at a predetermined cycle (every 100 milliseconds or the like). The date and time information stored in the temporary area may be memorable as log information indicating the power failure date and time when the RAM clear notification command or the power failure recovery designation command from the main board 11 is received. Then, after executing the backup process during the effect control (step S79), the effect control timer interrupt process ends. In the backup process during production control in step S79, when the preset backup conditions are satisfied, backup data indicating various log information is transferred to the log areas provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. A storage process for storing and storing is executed. The log information to be stored in this case may be information including a part or all of the operation history, the setting history, the error history, and the like with respect to the plurality of electronic components used for the game and the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the log information may include date and time information indicating the stored date and time.

FIG. 10 shows an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted for the game from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12. In the following, the subscript H is indicated to be a hexadecimal number. The effect control command that can be received by the effect control microcomputer 120 has a 2-byte structure, the first byte is MODE data indicating the classification of the command, and the second byte is EXT data indicating the type of the command. The first bit (bit 7) of the upper data (MODE data) of the effect control command is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of the lower data (EXT data) of the effect control command is always set to "0". Will be done. The effect control command is not limited to a 2-byte structure, and a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The effect control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 as the game progresses. The effect control microcomputer 120 receives any of the effect control commands as the game progresses. As described above, the effect control command is a game effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in accordance with the control related to the progress of the game. Is.

The variation start command 80XXH specifies that the variation starts for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is a plurality of special symbols. The lower data (EXT data) of the fluctuation start command, XXH, may be, for example, 01H at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol and 02H at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. The variation pattern designation command 81XXH specifies a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the fluctuation pattern specification command, indicates a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The display result specification command 8CXXXH specifies the display result of the variable display. XXH, which is lower-level data (EXT data) of the display result specification command, indicates a value corresponding to the display result of the variable display. The symbol confirmation command 8F00H specifies that the variation of the symbol is terminated. The RAM clear notification command 9000H notifies that when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the stored contents of the RAM 102 are cleared due to the initialization by the game control microcomputer 100. The setting change start command 9100H specifies the start of the setting change state that enables the setting value to be changed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The power failure recovery designation command 9200H specifies the execution of the power failure recovery process corresponding to the power failure recovery. The setting change end command 93XXH specifies the end of the setting change state. In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to the setting value newly set by the change may be set. For example, command 9300H specifies that the set value is set to "1", command 9301H specifies that the set value is set to "2", and command 9302H specifies that the set value is set to "3". Specify that it is set. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be specified by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value specification command for specifying the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prepared. The setting value specification command corresponds to the fluctuation start at each time of the special figure game, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command, in addition to the case where the setting change end command is transmitted. May be sent. Further, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times, for example, every 10 variation starts in the special figure game. Instead of these, or in addition to these, a setting value designation command may be transmitted in association with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. A setting value specification command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demo specification command.

The setting confirmation start command 9400H specifies the start of the setting confirmation state that enables the setting value to be confirmed when the power supply by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The setting confirmation end command 9401H specifies the end of the setting confirmation state. The game state designation command 95XXH specifies the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state, time reduction state) in which the time reduction control is performed. This is the second game state specification command corresponding to. The game control error designation command 96XXH specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) related to game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the game control error specification command, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. , The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) may be notified by the error notification process. The customer waiting demo designation command 9F00H specifies the display of the customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the progress stop of the game in the customer waiting state. The hit start designation command A0XXH specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The big winning opening open designation command A1XXH specifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The designation command A2XXH after opening the large winning opening specifies that the period during which the large winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The hit end designation command A3XXH specifies the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The background specification command B0XXH specifies the display state of the background screen according to the game state and the like. The first hold storage number designation command C1XXH specifies the first hold storage number. The first reserved storage number is the variable display reserved number corresponding to the first special symbol display device 4A among the reserved stored numbers, and is, for example, a value of any one of "0" to "4". The second hold storage number designation command C2XXH specifies the second hold storage number. The second reserved storage number is the variable display reserved number corresponding to the second special symbol display device 4B among the reserved storage numbers, and is, for example, a value of any one of "0" to "4". The winning determination result specification command C3XXH specifies the winning determination result. The winning determination result is a game in which the first start opening switch 22A detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening, or the second starting opening switch 22B has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening. Whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" when a sphere is detected, for example, using numerical data indicating a game random number extracted from a game random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 104 or RAM 102. The result of judging the fluctuation pattern and the result of judging the fluctuation pattern are shown. That is, whether the winning determination result is the result of determining whether or not the winning state is controlled before determining whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state such as the big hit gaming state, or whether the result is a specific fluctuation pattern. The result of judging whether or not it is is shown.

FIG. 11 shows an example of the contents of the effect control command, which is a test command that can be received by the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect control command, which is a test command, also has a 2-byte structure like the effect control command for games. In the effect control command that serves as a test command, the upper data (MODE data) is set to any of F0H to F3H. These higher-level data (MODE data) are values that are not used in the effect control command for games, and may be prepared in advance as dedicated commands for performing various inspections. The test command is not limited to the 2-byte configuration, and for example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used. The test command is not included in the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 as the game progresses. The test command is transmitted from the inspection device as an external device connected to, for example, the connector 150, 156, or the inspection connection unit 203 provided on the backup memory board 14 via signal wiring, and is transmitted from the effect control board 12. Based on the reception by the effect control microcomputer 120, the inspection process corresponding to the reception command can be executed. As described above, the effect control command, which is a test command, is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 to the effect control microcomputer 120 on the effect control board 12 as the game progresses. Unlike the control command, it is an effect control command for inspection that makes it possible to execute inspection processing that performs various inspections.

The black screen display command F000H causes the image display device 5 to display a black screen for testing. The black screen for testing is a screen for display inspection in which the display color is black. The ROM check screen command F005H displays the execution result and version information of various ROM inspection processes such as the external ROM 62AK120 on the screen of the image display device 5. The red display command F020H causes the image display device 5 to display a red screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is red. The green display command F021H causes the image display device 5 to display a green screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is green. The blue display command F022H causes the image display device 5 to display a blue screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is blue. The white display command F023H causes the image display device 5 to display a white screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is white. The black display command F024H causes the image display device 5 to display a black screen, which is a display inspection screen in which the display color is black. The RTC value type specification command F1XXH specifies the type of RTC value. XXH, which is lower-level data (EXT data) of the RTC value type specification command, indicates a value corresponding to the type of RTC value, such as year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, and second. The RTC numerical value setting command F2XXH sets specific contents and numerical values for the RTC value type specified by the RTC value type specification command F1XXH. XXH, which is the lower data (EXT data) of the RTC numerical value setting command, shows the values corresponding to specific numerical values for the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second, and corresponds to the day of the week from Sunday to Saturday. Shows the value.

The check processing and the like designation command F3XXH specifies to execute various check processes to be inspection processes. For example, XXH, which is lower-level data (EXT data) of a command for specifying a check process or the like, indicates a unique value different between one check process and another check process, or a value common to a plurality of types of check processes. There may be cases. Check processing, etc. designation command F3XXH constitutes a plurality of test commands, and if it is possible to execute various check processes, which are inspection processes, when they are received in a predetermined order as a combination of a plurality of test commands. Good. In addition, as the order of receiving a plurality of predetermined test commands corresponding to various check processes that are inspection processes, a plurality of types of orders are predetermined, and the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. It suffices if it is possible to execute different inspection processes depending on the type of.

FIG. 12 shows a setting example of the reception order of the test command by the reception order list and the processing to be executed. Backup clear, external RAM check (short), external RAM check (long), and backup check are prepared in advance as processes that can be executed by combining a plurality of test commands. FIG. 12A shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the backup clear process is executed. FIG. 12B shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed. FIG. 12C shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the external RAM check (long) process is executed. FIG. 12D shows the order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received when the backup inspection process is executed. In the reception order shown in FIGS. 12A to 12D, a combination of a plurality of test commands is received in the order from top to bottom, and when all the reception orders match, the corresponding processing is executed.

The backup clear process is a process of initializing the stored contents of backup data. The backup data is, for example, stored data in a log area provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14, and indicates various log information. The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes for checking whether or not data can be appropriately written and read in the storage area of the external RAM 122. The external RAM check (short) process may be a process that can be executed in a shorter time than the external RAM check (long) process, and may include a process content that is simpler than the external RAM check (long) process. .. The backup inspection process is an inspection process executed based on the stored contents of the backup data. In this case, the backup data read from the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14 may be output to an inspection device as an external device.

The external RAM check (short) process and the external RAM check (long) process are inspection processes that enable inspection of the state of an electronic component called an external RAM 122. The backup inspection process is an inspection process that enables confirmation of information on various electronic components based on the stored contents of backup data indicating log information. In this way, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 can execute an inspection process that makes it possible to inspect or confirm the state of electronic components by combining a plurality of test commands. The combination of a plurality of test commands according to the reception order is composed of a check processing or the like designation command in which all the upper data (MODE data) of the reception command is F3H. In this way, the combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process is configured as a combination of the effect control commands for inspection different from the effect control commands for the game received as the game progresses. .. Therefore, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed based on the reception of the effect control command for the game. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of electronic components from being erroneously executed based on the effect control command for the game received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. Can be done. In addition, since the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed while the game is in progress is reduced, troubles caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the erroneous execution of the inspection process can be prevented and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process.

The combination of the plurality of test commands received when the backup clear process is executed includes a command that is F311H among the designated commands such as the check process. The combination of a plurality of test commands received when the external RAM check (short) process is executed includes a command that is F312H among the designated commands such as the check process. The combination of a plurality of test commands received when the external RAM check (long) process is executed includes a command that is F313H among the designated commands such as the check process. The combination of a plurality of test commands received when executing the backup inspection process includes a command of F314H among the designated commands such as the check process. None of these commands are included in the combination of multiple test commands received when performing other processing. Thus, a combination of multiple test commands received to perform a particular test process contains a unique test command that is not included in the combination of multiple test commands received to perform another test process. It may be included. For example, among the specified commands such as check processing, the command that becomes F303H or the command that becomes F304H is to execute any of backup clear processing, external RAM clear (short) processing, external RAM clear (long) processing, and backup inspection processing. Is also included in the combination of multiple test commands received. Thus, a combination of multiple test commands received to perform a particular test process includes a common test command that is also included in a combination of multiple test commands received to perform another test process. You may be. Further, for example, the command that is F37FH among the designated commands such as the check process is the test command that is finally received in the combination of the plurality of received test commands regardless of which process is executed. Thus, the last test command received in a combination of multiple test commands received to perform a particular test process is the last test command received in a combination of multiple test commands received to perform another test process. It may be a command common to the received test command. It should be noted that the first test command received in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a unique command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of a plurality of test commands corresponding to a plurality of types of inspection processes. The test command of the part may be a unique command. Further, the test command received last in a combination of a plurality of test commands is not limited to a common command, and at least one received in a common order in a combination of a plurality of test commands corresponding to a plurality of types of inspection processes. The test command of the part may be a common command. The combination of the plurality of test commands received to execute the inspection process may be configured as a combination of a larger number of commands than the effect control command for the game received as the game progresses. In this case, the inspection process for inspecting the state of the electronic component is not executed by the number of effect control commands received for the game. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the inspection process for inspecting the state of electronic components from being erroneously executed based on the effect control command for the game received as the game progresses, and perform an appropriate inspection. Can be done. In addition, since the possibility that the inspection process is erroneously executed while the game is in progress is reduced, troubles caused by misunderstanding that the game machine is damaged due to the erroneous execution of the inspection process can be prevented and the game can be played. It is possible to prevent the disadvantage of the player due to the interruption and improve the reliability of the inspection process. As a combination of a plurality of test commands, there are a plurality of types in the order in which the test commands are received. Then, as inspection processing such as external RAM check (short) processing, external RAM check (long) processing, and backup inspection processing, different processing can be executed depending on the type of order in which a combination of a plurality of test commands is received. .. In addition, the inspection process for inspecting the state of electronic components differs depending on the combination of a plurality of test commands. As a result, various inspection processes for inspecting the state of electronic parts can be executed, and appropriate inspection can be performed.

In the effect control timer backup process executed in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the preset backup conditions are satisfied. Then, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied, the backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the satisfied backup condition is executed. As the backup condition, it is sufficient that a plurality of different conditions can be set according to the occurrence of an event including various changes and settings in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The backup control table showing a plurality of backup conditions may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (program management area or the like) provided in one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, for example. The data to be backed up may include different data depending on the backup conditions. Alternatively, the data to be backed up may include data common to a plurality of backup conditions. Regardless of which backup condition is satisfied, the backup target data indicating the log information including the date and time information may be stored. As a backup method for storing the data to be backed up, a batch backup and a divided backup may be prepared. In the case of batch backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of one timer interrupt for effect control. In the case of split backup, the data to be backed up by one backup is stored in the interrupt process based on the occurrence of multiple timer interrupts for effect control.

The backup process for storing and storing the backup target data according to the backup condition is performed every time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, when the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control in step S79. It may be feasible, or it may be feasible all at once when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the backup process is executed in a batch at the time of power failure, when it is determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control, for example, a backup showing log information including date and time information in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122. Store the target data.

FIG. 13 shows a setting example of the backup control table 120T that provides a plurality of backup conditions and the like. The backup control table 120T is configured so that backup conditions, backup methods, division methods, number of storage area bits, multiplicity, and verification methods can be set for each backup target data indicating the contents of log information. When the backup method is a split backup, "automatic", "every 100 KB", or the like can be specified as the split method. The division method is a method or method for dividing the data to be backed up when executing the division backup, and it is sufficient that the number of divisions and the data capacity at the time of division can be specified. For example, when the division method is "automatic", the number of divisions according to the data capacity of the data to be backed up is determined each time the backup process is executed. Alternatively, it may be possible to determine a different number of divisions and a data capacity at the time of division according to the processing load on the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14. The number of storage area bits is a processing unit of stored data in the log area, which is a storage area for storing log information in the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14, and in this example, 8 bits are shown. "8" or "3" indicating 3 bits can be specified. The degree of multiplicity is the degree of mirroring in which backup target data indicating the same log information is stored in a distributed manner while being duplicated in a plurality of different log areas. You can specify the number of times. For example, when the multiplicity is "1", mirroring is not performed, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored and backed up only once. When the multiplicity is "2", mirroring is performed twice, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored twice in different storage areas for backup. When the multiplicity is "3", the mirroring is performed three times, and the backup target data indicating the same log information is stored three times in different storage areas for backup. By increasing the degree of multiplexing, redundancy (availability) can be improved and the reliability of stored data can be improved.

The verification method that can be set for each backup target data is a method of verifying whether or not the backup process, which is the storage process of the backup target data, has been performed correctly. It is possible. When the verification method is error detection, when the data to be backed up is read from the log area, arbitrary error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc. is executed to verify the validity of the stored data. I hope I can. When the verification method is error detection and majority decision, in addition to error detection processing using parity, checksum, hash value, etc., in multiple log areas where backup target data that is multiplexed by mirroring and shows the same log information is stored. Compare the stored data. As a result of this comparison, if the stored contents match in a predetermined number of log areas among the plurality of log areas, it is sufficient to determine that the backup process has been performed correctly and to verify the validity of the stored data. For example, if the parity, checksum, or hash value calculated from the stored data in the plurality of log areas matches, it can be determined that the backup process has been performed correctly for each log area. If the parity, checksum, or hash value calculated from the stored data in multiple log areas does not match, and if the number of log areas for which the same parity, checksum, or hash value is calculated is the majority, those It should be judged that the backup process was performed correctly for the log area (judgment by majority decision). The "predetermined number of log areas" that is a condition for determining that the backup process has been performed correctly is not limited to the majority of the log areas, but is a preset fixed value (for example, "2") regardless of the multiplicity. It may be a variable value determined according to the multiplicity, the backup method, the division method, and the like. Instead of the judgment by majority vote, it may be determined that the backup processing has been performed correctly when the execution result of the error detection processing becomes normal for the first time.

The data to be backed up are system data, effect control error data, player history data, reception command data, set value change time data, power saving setting data, current time change data, power off time data, store name setting data, effect output amount. Includes data and production history data. The data to be backed up may include some of these data. The system data may include the effect control data stored in a predetermined area (such as an effect control data holding area) provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133. The effect control error data is data indicating an error that occurred during the execution of the effect control. The player history data is data related to the player acquired by the pachinko gaming machine 1. The received command data is data indicating an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. The set value change time data is data indicating the date and time when the set value is changed. The set value change time data may include data indicating the date and time when the set value is confirmed, or the set value confirmation time data may be generated separately from the set value change time data. The power saving setting data is data related to power saving control that can be set by the staff of the amusement park. The power saving control is set when, for example, the image display device 5 displays the power saving function setting screen by rotating the knob of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It suffices if the presence / absence and type (power saving mode) of the function can be changed. Alternatively, when a test command for power saving setting is input, the power saving function setting screen may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the presence / absence of the power saving function and the function (power saving mode) may be changed. The current time change data is data indicating that the setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC has been changed. The setting of the current date and time measured by the RTC may be one or both of the setting of the RTC provided in the timer circuit 135 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the setting of the RTC201 provided in the backup memory board 14. Just do it. The power off time data is data indicating the date and time when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The store name setting data is data indicating the setting of the store name that can be set by the staff of the amusement park or the like. The effect output amount data is data indicating the setting of the output amount such as the volume and the amount of light emission that can be set by the player or the like. The effect history data is data indicating the history of the effect executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of rotations indicating the number of times the variable display is executed counted from a specific timing, the number of type jackpots indicating the number of jackpots counted for each jackpot type, the number of consecutive chans indicating the number of jackpots that occurred without being controlled in the normal state, and the player Arbitrary information according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1 and the progress of control, such as the character selection contents of the effect image set by, the effect customization indicating the effect theme, the mission achievement status indicating the achievement status of the predetermined mission, and the like. It suffices if the data indicating the above can be stored as backup target data.

The backup conditions that can be set for each backup target data may be any conditions that can occur as the game or effect progresses, such as settings, control, determination, and detection in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the production control backup process executed in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, it is preset according to the processing result by the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 of the effect control microcomputer 120. It may be determined whether or not any of the backup conditions is satisfied. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S75, the effect device is set by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or by determining various detection results. When an error occurs related to the included electronic components, control is performed to notify the error. In this case, in the backup process during effect control, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and the effect control error data is created. In this way, when it is determined in the backup process during the effect control that the backup condition is satisfied, the control signal corresponding to the backup command for the backup during the effect control is transmitted to the bup-up memory board 14. The backup instruction for backup during production control may include data to be backed up. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives the backup command for backup during the effect control, the memory controller 200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the backup target data by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC201. By storing error information related to electronic components including the effect device, it becomes easy to identify defects and improve performance.

The backup process during effect control is executed in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process based on the occurrence of the effect control timer interrupt process. Then, when the event occurrence condition according to the processing result by the control device or the processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 is satisfied, and the backup condition set for each backup target data related to a plurality of electronic parts including the effect device is satisfied. Is executed, a backup process for storing the data to be backed up is executed. In this way, when the event occurrence conditions related to a plurality of electronic components are satisfied, and when the event occurrence conditions corresponding to the processing results of the control device or processing device such as the CPU 131 or VDP 140 are satisfied, the log area or the like is stored. It is possible to execute a writing process for writing and storing information about a plurality of electronic components in the area.

The backup conditions that can be set for each data to be backed up may include write conditions that are different from the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components. For example, in the player history data, the backup condition is satisfied when the data related to the player is updated, regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. For the received command data, the backup condition may be satisfied when the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, even if the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components does not occur. For the store name setting data, the backup condition is satisfied when the name of the store corresponding to the amusement park is set regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. System data is stored regardless of whether backup conditions are met when updating data due to an event corresponding to multiple electronic components, or whether an event corresponding to multiple electronic components has occurred. Backup conditions may be met when updating data. As described above, even when the backup condition as the write condition different from the event occurrence condition corresponding to the plurality of electronic components is satisfied, the backup process for storing the backup target data is executed. When a writing condition different from the occurrence condition is satisfied, a writing process for writing and storing game-related information different from the information related to a plurality of electronic components in a storage area such as a log area. Can be executed. When an event occurs according to a defect in an electronic component, backup data including game-related information is stored, so it is possible to easily identify the relationship between the progress of the game or production and the defect in the electronic component. It is possible to easily grasp the situation of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the data to be backed up is the effect control error data, the backup condition is not limited to the one in which the error occurs only, and the backup condition may be set including the time of error recovery. For example, in the error notification process executed in step S75, the effect device is set by determining the reception result of the game control error designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or by determining various detection results. When an error occurs related to the included electronic components, control is performed to notify the error. In this case, in the backup process during effect control, it is determined that the backup condition at the time of error occurrence is satisfied, and the effect control error data is created. After that, when the error is no longer detected with respect to the electronic component targeted for the error notification, it is determined that the electronic component has recovered from the error. Even when the error is recovered by such a determination, it may be determined that the backup condition is satisfied in the backup process during the effect control, and the effect control error recovery data may be created. The effect control error recovery data created in this way is included in the backup command for backup during effect control and transmitted to the backup memory board 14 in the same manner as the effect control error data. When the memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 receives the backup command for backup during the effect control, the memory controller 200 may execute the process of writing the log information including the backup target data by using the date and time information acquired from the RTC201. By making it possible to store the effect control error recovery data as backup data in addition to the effect control error data, it is possible to memorize the history of error occurrence and recovery related to the effect control and enable ex post facto verification. The situation can be easily grasped.

In the information processing at power-on in step S23 of the effect control main process, a backup recovery process for restoring the settings and control based on the log information stored in the log area may be executed. In the backup recovery process, verification may be performed by a verification method according to the data to be backed up, and it may be determined whether or not the stored data is normal. For example, when the verification method is a majority decision together with error detection, if the execution result of the error detection process is normal in a predetermined number of log areas among a plurality of log areas in which backup target data indicating the same log information is stored, Judge that the stored data is normal. In this way, if the stored data is normal, the data recovery process using the stored data in the log area is performed. On the other hand, when the stored data is not normal, the initial value is set using the initial data different from the stored data in the log area. The initial data may be, for example, data stored in one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, and used when the initialization process is executed in step S21 of the game control main process. As a result, even if the backup target data cannot be stored correctly, the initial value can be set using the initial data according to the recovery from the power failure. Instead of the initial data, special data corresponding to the case where the stored data is not normal may be used. Unlike the initial data, the special data may be any data suitable for restoring settings and control. Whether to use the initial data or the special data may be different depending on the data to be backed up for which it is determined that the stored data is not normal. For example, if the data to be backed up is system data, data recovery using special data is performed when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. On the other hand, if the data to be backed up is the effect output amount data, data recovery using the initial data is performed when it is determined that the stored data is not normal. The setting of whether to use the initial data or the special data is made in advance based on the update frequency and amount of update data of the data to be backed up, the importance of the data, the target parts, the target control, a combination of some or all of them, and the like. It suffices if it is decided. The backup recovery process may be executed when the data recovery conditions set in advance in the backup process during the effect control are satisfied. The data recovery condition may be satisfied, for example, when a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received.

In the effect control during backup process, it may be determined whether or not the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12. In this case, the voltage value at the terminal TM02 of the connector 154 may be determined. Whether or not to execute the storage process may be different depending on the determination result of the connection state, or the storage process of different contents may be executed. For example, when the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12, the storage process of storing and storing the log information in the log area is not executed. As described above, in the range in which the preset limiting condition that the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12 is satisfied, a limitation as a limit that the storage process is not executed may be provided. On the other hand, as long as the storage process can be executed as long as the restriction condition that the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12 is not satisfied. As a storage process of different contents, when the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12, a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 is used as a log area to store and store backup data indicating various log information. The process may be executed. In this case, the data capacity to be stored as the backup target data may be reduced as compared with the case where the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12. For example, the effect control error data and the received command data are the backup target data, and the storage process for storing the log information is executed when the backup condition is satisfied, while the system data and the player history data are the backup target data. Instead, even if the backup condition is satisfied, the storage process for storing the log information may not be executed. In this way, within the range in which the preset limiting condition that the backup memory board 14 is not connected to the effect control board 12 is satisfied, a limit is provided as a limit of reducing the data capacity to be stored by the storage process. You may. On the other hand, in the range where the restriction condition that the backup memory board 14 is connected to the effect control board 12 is not satisfied, the data capacity to be stored by the storage process is not reduced, and the backup corresponding to all the backup conditions is supported. The target data may be stored and stored. Not limited to the memory processing, for any processing or control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a limitation may be provided as a limit that a specific processing or control is not executed within a range in which a preset restriction condition is satisfied. Alternatively, a limit may be provided as a limit in which the processing amount and the controlled amount are reduced as compared with the range in which the limiting condition is not satisfied.

14 and 15 show a specific example of displaying the maintenance history screen. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step S5 of the game control main process, and when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. Upon receiving this setting confirmation start command, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 is shown in FIG. 14A, for example, when the maintenance mode process is executed in step S78 of the effect control timer interrupt process. Display during setting confirmation. In the setting confirmation display, for example, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "setting confirmation is in progress". The display during setting confirmation includes a character display such as "press the push button to shift to maintenance mode" on the image display device 5. In this way, in the setting confirmation display, a display prompting an operation for shifting to the maintenance mode is performed. At this time, if the staff of the amusement park or the person in charge of the manufacturer detects the operation of pressing the push button 31B, the image display device 5 displays the maintenance mode menu screen as shown in FIG. 14 (B). Move to maintenance mode. On the maintenance mode menu screen, the options of "maintenance history", "setting change / confirmation history", and "current time setting" are displayed, and the current time is displayed.

When the option 012IW106 of the "maintenance history" is selected on the maintenance mode menu screen, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 14 (C). On the maintenance history screen, the date and time and the log contents are displayed in association with each other, and the latest log information is displayed in order so as to be ranked higher. As an example, a VDP error indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the internal state of the VDP140, an illegal winning error indicating that an illegal winning entry to a winning opening such as the first major winning opening or the second major winning opening has been detected, and a count switch Each log information of the switch abnormality error indicating that the abnormality of various switches such as 23 was detected, the prize ball abnormality error indicating that the prize ball abnormality was detected, the magnet error indicating that the abnormal magnetism was detected, and the probability change failure Log information indicating that the error was detected is displayed. When there are a plurality of maintenance history screens, the selection operation of the next page shifts to the second page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 14 (D). In this case, the log information of the start of the setting change and the end of the setting change, the log information of the power cut date and time and the power on date and time, and the log information of the left-handed notification and the full tank notification are displayed. If there is a next page, the selection operation of the next page shifts to the third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15 (E). At this time, log information indicating the start of setting confirmation and the end of setting confirmation, log information indicating that the current time was set during maintenance mode during setting confirmation, and log indicating that RAM clearing by initialization processing was executed. Information etc. are displayed. Further, when the selection operation of the next page is performed, the process shifts to the fourth page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15 (F). Here, the log information of the RWM abnormality error indicating that some kind of RAM abnormality has occurred when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and the log information of the power interruption date and time and the power on date and time corresponding to the later date and time are displayed. .. Since an RWM abnormality error occurred based on these log information, the staff at the game hall once stopped the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1, and then turned on the power again while turning on the clear switch, and the initialization process was performed. It can be confirmed after the fact that the RAM has been cleared. Further, the log information of the CPU exception event indicating that the exception event has occurred in the CPU 131, and the log information of the power failure date and time and the power-on date and time corresponding to the date and time after that are displayed. Based on these log information, a CPU exception event occurred, so the staff at the game hall stopped the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1, but when the power was turned on the next day, the CPU exception event no longer occurred. You can confirm that after the fact.

The third page of the maintenance history screen as shown in FIG. 15 (E) shows the log information indicating that the current time has been set, which is earlier than the log information indicating that the setting confirmation has been started. Log information is displayed. For example, the setting confirmation was started at 09:36:28 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018, while the current time was set at 09:36 on Wednesday, March 21, 2018: It is said to be 16. In this way, the date and time inconsistency occurs before and after the current time setting because when the current time is set, the date and time information after the setting is read out and the log information is recorded. In this example, the log information is recorded in the log area in the order in which the log information is generated, and even if the date and time do not match before and after the current time setting, the log information is displayed in the order in which the log information is generated.

In addition to the display of the maintenance history screen, or instead of the display of the maintenance history screen, a two-dimensional bar code may be displayed on the image display device 5 so that log information can be acquired. For example, a two-dimensional barcode displayed on the image display device 5 is photographed by using an imaging device connected to the inspection device. By photographing such a two-dimensional barcode, log information can be provided to the inspection device. In addition, the log information may be output by any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of a part or all of them. Arbitrary information output, not limited to log information, uses any output method such as display output, wireless output, infrared output, audio output, ultrasonic output, or a combination of some or all of them. All you need is.

The log information that can be displayed on the maintenance history screen may be all of the log information shown in the backup data, or may be a part of the log information shown in the backup data. For example, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the control device, such as an exception event of the CPU 131, can be displayed. Further, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to an event occurrence condition that can be established according to the internal state of the processing device, such as an error interrupt request of VDP140, can be displayed. On the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of a specific event that can be established according to the processing result by the CPU 131, such as the judgment when an error occurs in the backup process during production control, when the time is changed, or when the power is turned on again, can be displayed. Is. On the other hand, on the maintenance history screen, log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions of events other than specific events, such as judgment at the time of updating the player history data in the backup process during production control, at the time of power saving setting, and at the time of name setting, is displayed. do not do. As described above, the log information stored as backup data may include log information that is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, log information that is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen but can be displayed on the special maintenance history screen may be provided. The special maintenance screen may be displayed according to an arbitrary detection result, such as a detection result of an operation that is a predetermined operation for the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In this case, the operation procedure for the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may not be notified to the staff of the game hall, and may be recognizable by the person in charge of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1. It is not limited to the detection result, and it is sufficient if a special maintenance history screen can be displayed according to arbitrary control or processing. As described above, in the range of the log information of a specific type among the plurality of types of log information, there may be a limit as a limit that the log information is not displayed on the maintenance history screen. Within the range of log information other than a specific type, it suffices if it can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. Alternatively, a limitation may be provided as a limit that the log information of a specific type among the plurality of types of log information can be displayed only on the special maintenance history screen and is not displayed on the normal maintenance history screen.

FIG. 16 shows a specific example when the setting change / confirmation history selection operation is performed during the maintenance mode. When the setting confirmation display as shown in FIG. 16A is being performed, the operation of pressing the push button 31B by the staff of the amusement park or the person in charge of the manufacturer is detected, and FIG. The maintenance mode menu screen as shown in is displayed. Then, the option 012IW107 of "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and operated. In this case, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen as shown in FIG. 16 (C). On the setting change / confirmation history screen, the date and time, whether the setting is changed or confirmed, and the changed setting value or the confirmed setting value are displayed in association with each other so that the latest log information is ranked higher. It is displayed in order. If the "current time setting" option is selected and operated while the maintenance mode menu screen is being displayed, the image display device 5 switches to the display of the current time setting screen. On the current time setting screen, the year, month, day, day of the week, hour, minute, or second item is selected by tilting the stick controller 31A left and right, and the number for each item is selected by tilting the stick controller 31A back and forth. Will be done. When the staff of the game hall or the person in charge of the manufacturer presses the push button 31B after the current time setting screen is displayed, the current date and time is set to the currently displayed date and time.

(Explanation of feature 41AK)
FIG. 17 shows an execution example of the backup process relating to the feature unit 41AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, thereby causing the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 and the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 to 41AKM23. It has a function. Further, a writing flag 41AKF1 and a backup data buffer 41AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133. The backup data buffer 41AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including the buffer areas 41AKB11 to 41AKB13. The backup data memories 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The backup storage unit 41AKA1 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13 as a log area. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23 as a log area. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33 as a log area.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM21 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 41AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception event backup process in step S42 of the CPU exception event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including the exception event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM22 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S52 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during the effect control in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and is data indicating log information including the effect control error data. Anything is fine. The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 41AKM21 to 41AKM23 is temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 according to the creation order. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 41AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written in the buffer area 41AKB13. Is stored.

When the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 has backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1, it reads and acquires the backup data. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this execution example, the same backup data is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, corresponding to the multiplicity of "3". For example, the backup data read from the backup data buffer 41AKAB1's buffer area 41AKAB11 and acquired is the backup storage area 41AKA11 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA21 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA31 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. It is memorized by copying and writing. At the start of writing backup data to the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3, the writing flag 41AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of writing the backup data, the writing flag 41AKF1 is cleared and the backup data is turned off. When the writing flag 41AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 41AKM10 permits writing of new backup data and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 41AKB1 is not read.

For example, with respect to the backup data read from the buffer area 41AKB11 of the backup data buffer 41AKB1 and the writing to the log area is completed and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB12. Can be read. The backup data read and acquired at this time is copied and written to the backup storage area 41AKA12 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area AKA22 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA32 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. Be remembered. When the writing to the log area is completed and the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned off, the backup data temporarily stored in the next buffer area 41AKB13 can be read. The backup data read and acquired in this case is copied and written in the backup storage area 41AKA13 of the backup storage unit 41AKA1, the backup storage area 41AKA23 of the backup storage unit 41AKA2, and the backup storage area 41AKA33 of the backup storage unit 41AKA3. It is remembered in.

The backup storage unit 41AKA1 is provided as a continuous storage area of 1, for example, by assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. The backup storage unit 41AKA2 is provided as one continuous storage area by, for example, assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA21 to 41AKA23. The backup storage unit 41AKA3 is provided as one continuous storage area by, for example, assigning continuous addresses to the backup storage areas 41AKA31 to 41AKA33. Then, when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, writing is prohibited for new backup data. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components, if the backup data writing process corresponding to one of the conditions is being executed. , Do not execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, if the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 is on. Corresponding to, the backup data writing process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is not executed. Alternatively, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied and the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is being executed, the writing flag 41AKF1 is turned on. Correspondingly, the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 41AKC1 is not executed. Which writing process is to be executed first may be determined according to the order in which the backup data is created. Similarly, when the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control are satisfied, or when the conditions for the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control and the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied, the write process is executed in the same manner. You just have to control it. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the limit of not executing the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition within the range in which the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed. Is set as a limit. As long as the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The order in which the backup data is created may be determined according to the processing priority of the effect control microcomputer 120. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied, the priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the priority of the VDP error interrupt processing, so that the occurrence event information creation processing unit The creation of the backup data by the 41AKM 21 may be executed before the creation of the backup data by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM22. When the occurrence conditions of the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 and the effect control error determination 41AKC3 are satisfied, the priority of the VDP error interrupt process is higher than the priority of the effect control timer interrupt process, so that the occurrence event information is created. The creation of the backup data by the processing unit 41AKM22 may be executed before the creation of the backup data by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 41AKM23.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device such as an exception event of the CPU 131. The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device such as the error interrupt request of the VDP140. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 41AKC3 can be satisfied according to the processing result by the CPU 131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the occurrence condition of the CPU internal error 41AKC1 or the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 is satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the occurrence condition of the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control is satisfied. become.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. When the occurrence conditions of the error determination 41AKC3 during the effect control are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which the occurrence conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. In these cases, writing is prohibited when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, so if the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed, the document corresponding to the next occurrence condition. Do not execute the inclusive process. In this way, among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the range in which the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the write process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition can be executed.

When a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the order in which the generation conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is satisfied during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied first, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the processing when the CPU exception event occurs is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwriting process may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 41AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2 are satisfied at the same time, the processing priority of the CPU exception event occurrence processing is higher than the processing priority of the VDP error interrupt processing. The write process corresponding to the error 41AKC1 may be executed as an overwriting process that overwrites the stored data by the write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 41AKC2.

When a plurality of backup conditions are satisfied as a plurality of generation conditions, the order of creating backup data and whether or not to execute the write process may be determined according to the contents of the backup target data. For example, if the backup condition when an error occurs in which the backup target data is production control error data and the backup condition when a command is received in which the backup target data is received command data are satisfied at the same time, the backup condition when an error occurs. The write process corresponding to the above may be executed first, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command may be executed later. Further, the write process corresponding to the backup condition when an error occurs may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition when the command is received may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the defect of the electronic component including the effect device is preferentially stored, the possibility of appropriately dealing with the defect of the electronic component is increased. Alternatively, the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command may be executed first, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of error occurrence may be executed later. Further, the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of receiving the command may be executed, and the write process corresponding to the backup condition at the time of error occurrence may not be executed. In this case, since the information regarding the reception status of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 is preferentially stored, the possibility of appropriately dealing with the control defect related to the game is increased.

(Explanation of feature 42AK)
FIG. 18 shows an execution example of the backup process relating to the feature unit 42AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132 to execute the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 and the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 1. It has the function of 42AKM23. The backup data memories 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, and backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33. The backup storage unit 42AKA11 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA12 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 42AKA13 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA21 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA211 to 42AKA213 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA22 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA23 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA31 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA311 to 42AKA313 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA32 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 as a log area. The backup storage unit 42AKA33 includes a plurality of backup storage areas including the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333 as a log area.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the CPU internal error 42AKC1. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the exception event backup process in step S42 of the CPU exception event occurrence process, and is data indicating log information including the exception event information. Good. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S52 of the VDP error interrupt process, and may be data indicating log information including VDP error information. Just do it. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23 creates backup data indicating the occurrence event information corresponding to the occurrence of the error determination 42AKC3 during the effect control. The backup data created at this time is, for example, data created by executing the backup process during the effect control in step S79 of the effect control timer interrupt process, and is data indicating log information including the effect control error data. Anything is fine. The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing units 42AKM21 to 42AKM23 can be stored in the log area of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3 in parallel with each other.

The memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. The memory writing processing unit 42AKM13 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM23. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log areas of the backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3.

Also in this execution example, the multiplicity corresponds to "3". The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13 while being duplicated. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM22 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 while being duplicated. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKA23 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 while being duplicated. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA111 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA121 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA131 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. , It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 42AKA112 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA122 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA132 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The next backup data acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKAM21 is the backup storage area 42AKA113 of the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage area 42AKA123 of the backup storage unit 42AKA12, and the backup storage area 42AKA133 of the backup storage unit 42AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing.

In the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13 and the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage area 42AKA111 to 42AKA113 and the backup storage area 42AKA211-42AKA213, and the backup storage area 42AKA121 to 42AKA123 and the backup are backed up. Different addresses are assigned between the storage areas 42AKA221 to 42AKA223, and different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas AKA131 to 42AKA133 and the backup storage areas 42AKA231 to 42AKA233, so that they are provided as different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA21 to 42AKA23 and the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage area 42AKA211-42AKA213 and the backup storage area 42AKA311-42AKA313, and the backup storage area 42AKA221-42AKA223 and the backup are backed up. Different addresses are assigned between the storage areas 42AKA321 to 42AKA323, and different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas AKA231 to 42AKA233 and the backup storage areas 42AKA331 to 42AKA333, so that they are provided as different storage areas. In the backup storage units 42AKA31 to 42AKA33 and the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13, for example, different addresses are assigned between the backup storage area 42AKA311-42AKA313 and the backup storage area 42AKA111 to 42AKA113, and the backup storage area 42AKA321 to 42AKA323 and the backup are backed up. Different addresses are assigned between the storage areas 42AKA121 to 42AKA123, and different addresses are assigned between the backup storage areas AKA331 to 42AKA333 and the backup storage areas 42AKA131 to 42AKA133, so that they are provided as different storage areas. By using physically different storage devices, different storage areas may be provided. The memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can execute backup data writing processing in parallel with each other. As a result, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied among the occurrence conditions of the event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components, the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed, and the other It is possible to execute the process of writing backup data corresponding to the conditions.

For example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 and the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied, the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing the backup data write process corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC1. Can execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. When the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 are satisfied, the memory write process is performed even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM12 is executing the backup data write process corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2. The unit 42AKM13 can execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the error determination 42AKC3 during the effect control. When the conditions for generating the effect control error determination 42AKC3 and the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied, the memory write process is performed even while the memory write processing unit 42AKM13 is executing the backup data write process corresponding to the effect control error determination 42AKC3. The unit 42AKM11 can execute the backup data writing process corresponding to the CPU internal error 42AKC. In this way, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition can be executed even within the range in which the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is being executed. I hope I can. As long as the backup data writing process corresponding to one condition is not being executed, it is naturally sufficient that the backup data writing process corresponding to the other condition can be executed.

The condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control device such as an exception event of the CPU 131. The condition for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 can be satisfied according to the internal state of the processing device such as the error interrupt request of the VDP140. The occurrence condition of the effect control error determination 42AKC3 can be satisfied according to the processing result by the CPU 131, such as the determination when an error occurs in the effect control backup process. Therefore, when the occurrence condition of the CPU internal error 42AKC1 or the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 is satisfied, the backup data writing process can be executed with priority over the case where the occurrence condition of the error determination 42AKC3 during the effect control is satisfied. May become. For example, the creation order when creating backup data is determined according to the processing priority in the effect control microcomputer 120, so that the backup data writing processing by the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 is also in the order of creation. It may be executed according to the priority.

FIG. 19 shows an execution example different from the case of FIG. 18 regarding the backup process relating to the feature unit 42AK. In this execution example, when the conditions for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those conditions are satisfied, and the writing process can be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. .. In this case, a writing flag 42AKF1 and a backup data buffer 42AKB1 are provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133. The backup data buffer 42AKB1 includes a plurality of buffer areas including a buffer area 42AKB11 to 42AKB13. The occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 creates backup data in the order in which the CPU internal error 42AKC1 occurs. For example, when the occurrence conditions of the CPU internal errors X1 to Xn corresponding to n times are satisfied as the CPU internal error 42AKC1 a plurality of times, the occurrence event information creation processing unit 42AKM21 performs the backup data Y1 corresponding to each occurrence condition. ~ Yn is created and temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. For example, the first created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB11, the next created backup data is written and stored in the buffer area 42AKB12, and the subsequently created backup data is written in the buffer area 42AKB13. Is stored. When the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 has backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 reads and acquires the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 42AKA11 to 42AKA13. At the start of writing backup data to the log area, the writing flag 42AKF1 is set to the ON state. At the end of writing the backup data, the writing flag 42AKF1 is cleared and the backup data is turned off. When the writing flag 42AKF1 is off, the memory writing processing unit 42AKM11 permits writing of new backup data and reads the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1. On the other hand, when the writing flag 42AKF1 is on, writing of new backup data is prohibited, and the backup data temporarily stored in the backup data buffer 42AKB1 is not read.

Even when the conditions for generating the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data may be created in the order in which the conditions for the occurrence are satisfied, and the writing process may be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. Even if the occurrence conditions of the error determination 42AKC3 during production control are satisfied a plurality of times, the backup data is created in the order in which those occurrence conditions are satisfied, and the writing process may be executed in the order in which the backup data is created. .. In these cases, the writing is prohibited when the writing flag provided corresponding to the VDP error interrupt 42AKC2 and the effect control error determination 42AKC3 is on, thereby corresponding to the previous occurrence condition. If the write process is being executed, the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. In this way, among the event occurrence conditions corresponding to a plurality of electronic components, when the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the range in which the writing process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is being executed. Then, a limit is set as a limit that the writing process corresponding to the next occurrence condition is not executed. As long as the write process corresponding to the previous occurrence condition is not being executed, it is sufficient that the write process corresponding to the next occurrence condition can be executed.

When a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the order in which the generation conditions are satisfied. For example, if another occurrence condition is satisfied during the execution of the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied first, the write process corresponding to the occurrence condition that is satisfied later may not be executed. Alternatively, when a plurality of generation conditions are satisfied, whether or not to execute any of the writing processes may be determined according to the processing priority. For example, among the exception events of the CPU 131, the exception event having a high processing priority and the exception event having a low processing priority may be set in advance. When the condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is satisfied a plurality of times at the same time, the write process corresponding to the exception event having a high processing priority is executed, and the write process corresponding to the exception event having a low processing priority is executed. It may not be executed. Further, when a plurality of occurrence conditions are satisfied, the overwriting process may be executed according to the processing priority. For example, when the condition for generating the CPU internal error 42AKC1 is satisfied a plurality of times at the same time, the write process corresponding to the exception event having a high processing priority stores the stored data by the write process corresponding to the exception event having a low processing priority. It may be executed as an overwriting process for overwriting.

(Explanation of feature 43AK)
FIG. 20 shows an execution example of the backup process relating to the feature unit 43AK. In this case, the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes a program read from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132 to perform the functions of the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 and the occurrence event information creation processing. It has the functions of the units 43AKM21 and 43AKM22. The backup data memories 210A to 210C of the backup memory board 14 are provided with the backup storage units 43AKA21 together with the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The backup storage unit 43AKA11 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes a backup storage area 43AKA111 to 43AKA113 as a log area. The backup storage unit 43AKA12 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA121 to 43AKA123 as log areas. The backup storage unit 43AKA13 is an 8-bit storage area, and includes a backup storage area 43AKA131 to 43AKA133 as a log area. On the other hand, the backup storage unit 43AKA21 is a 3-bit storage area, and includes backup storage areas 43AKA211 to 43AKA213 as a log area. The 8-bit storage area is a storage area capable of executing a writing process and a reading process of stored data in 8-bit units. The 3-bit storage area is a storage area capable of executing a writing process and a reading process of stored data in units of 3 bits.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition of the storage area bit number of "8" and the multiplicity of "3" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM11 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. The same backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is distributed and stored in the three backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, while being duplicated. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA111 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA121 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA131 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. , It is memorized by copying and writing. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is stored in the backup storage area 43AKA112 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA122 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA132 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing. The next backup data acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21 is the backup storage area 43AKA113 of the backup storage unit 43AKA11, the backup storage area 43AKA123 of the backup storage unit 43AKA12, and the backup storage area 43AKA133 of the backup storage unit 43AKA13. It is memorized by copying and writing.

The occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 creates backup data corresponding to the case where the backup condition in which the number of storage area bits is "3" and the multiplicity is "1" is satisfied. The memory writing processing unit 43AKM12 acquires the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22. The backup data acquired at this time is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and stored in the log area of the backup storage unit 43AKA21. For the backup storage unit 43AKA21 which is a 3-bit storage area, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is stored in a smaller amount than the backup data storage area created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM21. Stored in the area. Specifically, a 3-bit storage area is used in which the number of storage area bits corresponds to "3" and the storage data is in 3-bit units, which is less than the 8-bit units of the 8-bit storage area. Further, the multiplicity corresponds to "1", and a single backup data is stored without being distributed without mirroring. For example, the backup data first acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA211 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data next acquired from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKAM22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA212 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying. The backup data acquired next from the occurrence event information creation processing unit 22 is stored by writing to the backup storage area 43AKA213 of the backup storage unit 43AKA21 without copying.

In the backup control table 120T, when the backup target data is any of system data, effect control error data, player history data, received command data, and set value change time data, the number of storage area bits is "8", which is large. Severity is specified as "3". On the other hand, when any of the power saving setting data, the current time change data, the power off time data, the store name setting data, and the effect output amount data, the number of storage area bits is "3" and the degree of multiplexing is "1". Is set to. For example, when the backup condition corresponding to the system data is satisfied for the data to be backed up, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 is subjected to a plurality of backup data in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM11. It is written to the log area and stored. On the other hand, when the backup target data satisfies the backup condition corresponding to the power saving setting data, the backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM22 is small in the backup storage unit 43AKA21 by the memory writing processing unit 43AKM12. It is written to the log area and stored. In this way, when writing the first information corresponding to the first generation condition, the same backup data is stored in a plurality of log areas in the backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13. On the other hand, when writing the second information corresponding to the second generation condition, the backup data is stored in a small log area in the backup storage unit 43AKA21.

For example, the occurrence condition at the time of power saving change, which is the backup condition for which the backup target data corresponds to the power saving setting data, is less frequently satisfied than the occurrence condition at the time of data update, which is the backup condition for the backup target data corresponding to the system data. As described above, the second occurrence condition may be satisfied less frequently than the first occurrence condition. Events that correspond to the occurrence conditions that are frequently satisfied affect the memory of log information related to other events when log information cannot be properly stored, for example, when noise occurs during execution of write processing. Is likely to be given. An event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is infrequently satisfied is less likely to affect the memory of log information related to other events than an event corresponding to an occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied. Therefore, when writing the log information corresponding to the occurrence condition that is frequently satisfied, by storing the same backup data in a plurality of log areas, it is possible to prevent the trouble due to the abnormality of the stored data from spreading. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to an occurrence condition that is rarely satisfied, it is possible to prevent an increase in the storage data capacity by storing backup data in a small log area.

The power saving setting data can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a staff member of the game hall. As described above, the second information corresponding to the second generation condition may be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be reset by the administrator even if a problem occurs in the setting contents, and there is a possibility that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be disadvantaged. Low. On the other hand, for example, the data corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event that occurs according to the progress of the game or the production is impossible or difficult to reset, and there is a high possibility that the player will be disadvantaged or distrusted. Shows information about. Therefore, when writing log information corresponding to the occurrence conditions that cannot be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the same backup data is stored in multiple log areas so that verification is accurate when an abnormality occurs. The sex is enhanced. On the other hand, when writing log information corresponding to the generation conditions that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent an increase in the storage data capacity by storing the backup data in a small log area. The information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the information shown in the power saving setting data, but the RTC information shown in the current time change data, the store name information shown in the store name setting data, and the information of the store name. The information on the volume and the amount of light shown in the effect output amount data, or a part or a combination of these may be used. In addition, when the projector is used as the effect device, the information of the display setting by the projector may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The information on the display setting by the projector can be set by the person in charge at the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, unlike the person in charge at the game hall. As described above, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a staff member of the game hall, or may include a person in charge of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The information is not limited to the projector, and the information of the setting regarding the effect frequency using the specific effect device may be included in the information that can be set by the administrator of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The backup storage units 43AKA11 to 43AKA13, which are 8-bit storage areas, may be provided with different backup storage areas depending on the type of log information shown in the backup data. For example, the backup storage area when the backup target data is the reception command data may be provided as a storage area different from the backup storage area when the backup target data is the effect control error data. A backup storage area corresponding to an exception event of the CPU 131 or an error interrupt request of the VDP 140 may be provided inside or outside the backup storage area corresponding to the effect control error data. In this way, when a backup storage area corresponding to the type of log information is provided in the 8-bit storage area, the memory write processing unit 43AKM11 determines the backup storage area according to the established backup conditions. The backup data created by the occurrence event information creation processing unit 43AKM21 may be written and stored in the data.

(Explanation of feature 44AK)
FIG. 21 shows a configuration example of the feature unit 44AK. In this configuration example, the first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B are provided. The first effect control board 44AK12A and the second effect control board 44AK12B may have the configurations and functions provided by the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 in the above embodiment. A first control unit 44AK10A, a first backup storage unit 44AK11A, and a connector 44AK13A are mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A. The second control unit 44AK10B, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, and the connector 44AK13B are mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13A of the first effect control board 44AK12A is connected to the connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B. The connector 44AK13B of the second effect control board 44AK12B is connected to the connector 44AK11B of the first effect control board 44AK12A. The first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B may each have a part or all of the configurations and functions included in the effect control microcomputer 120 in the above embodiment. For example, the first control unit 44AK10A has a configuration and a function related to the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120, and the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and a function related to the VDP 140 of the effect control microcomputer 120. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may each have a part or all of the configurations and functions included in the backup memory board 14 in the above embodiment. For example, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A includes configurations and functions relating to the backup data memories 210A and 210B of the backup memory board 14, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B includes configurations and functions relating to the backup data memories 210C and 210D of the backup memory board 14. It has a function.

In the first effect control board 44AK12A, when the first control unit 44AK10A has the configuration and functions related to the CPU 131 in the above embodiment, for example, the serial communication circuit 137 of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the effect of the effect data memory board 16 are produced. A process for controlling a first electronic component such as a data memory is executed. In this case, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A stores backup data indicating log information regarding the first control unit 44AK10A. In the second effect control board 44AK12B, when the second control unit 44AK10B has the configuration and functions related to the VDP 140 in the above embodiment, for example, the sound processing circuit 141, the lamp control circuit 142, and the motor control circuit of the effect control microcomputer 120 A process for controlling a second electronic component such as 143 and the image display device 5 is executed. In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B stores backup data indicating log information regarding the second control unit 44AK10B. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can store the information about the first control unit 44AK10A, and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can store the information about the second control unit 44AK10B.

When the first control unit 44AK10A has a configuration and a function related to the CPU 131, the exception event information of the CPU 131 is stored in the log information by executing the exception event backup process in step S42 in the CPU exception event occurrence process. It is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When the second control unit 44AK10B has a configuration and a function related to the VDP 140, the log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 140 is executed by executing the error interrupt backup process in step S52 in the VDP error interrupt process. Is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this way, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the exception-time backup process in the CPU exception event occurrence-time process is executed. On the other hand, when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the VDP error rate is different from the case where the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. The backup process at the time of error interruption in the merge process may be executed. In addition, when the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and when the log information is stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, arbitrary storage processes different from each other are executed. You may.

Log information including exception event information of the CPU 131 is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information including the VDP error information of the VDP 140 is stored as information different from the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. Alternatively, in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, log information regarding an error generated by, for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is stored. On the other hand, in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, for example, log information regarding an error that has occurred in the image display device 5 is stored. In addition, the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may store log information related to arbitrary electronic components that are different from each other.

In addition, in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the first control unit 44AK10A may be stored, and in addition to or instead of this, the first 2 Log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the control unit 44AK10B may be stored. In the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the second control unit 44AK10B may be stored, and in addition to or instead of this, the first control Log information corresponding to the occurrence condition of the event related to the unit 44AK10A may be stored. When both log information is stored in both log areas, even if a storage error occurs in one log area, inspection such as analysis can be performed using the log information stored in the other log area. It becomes possible and the reliability of the stored data is improved. The configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 120 related to the CPU 131 and the configuration and function of the effect control microcomputer 120 related to the VDP 140 are not limited to those divided into the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B. For example, the configuration and functions of the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may be divided into a first control unit 44AK10A and a second control unit 44AK10B. In addition, a case where the first control unit 44AK10A and the second control unit 44AK10B are provided corresponding to a plurality of CPUs may be provided. The first control unit 44AK10A may have a configuration and a function related to a CPU, and the second control unit 44AK10B may have a configuration and a function related to light emission control.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are different from the first effect control board 44AK12A on which the first control unit 44AK10A is mounted and the second effect control board 44AK12B on which the second control unit 44AK10B is mounted. For example, it may be mounted on the backup memory board 14. In this case, the log information about the electronic component called the first control unit 44AK10A mounted on the first effect control board 44AK12A and the log information about the electronic component called the second control unit 44AK10B mounted on the second effect control board 44AK12B. Can be stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the second backup storage unit 44AK11B mounted on the common backup memory board 14. As described above, the backup data indicating the log information regarding the plurality of electronic components provided on the plurality of control boards may be stored in the log area of the storage device provided on the common backup memory board. Alternatively, the first backup memory board on which the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is mounted and the second backup memory board on which the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is mounted are combined with the first effect control board 44AK12A or the second effect control board 44AK12B. It may be provided as a substrate different from the above.

For example, the storage data capacity of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is 1 MB (megabytes). On the other hand, the storage data capacity of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is 512 KB (kilobytes). As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as storage devices different from each other in that the storage data capacities are different. Alternatively, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is configured using a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark). On the other hand, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is configured by using, for example, a SRAM with a battery. When a non-volatile ferroelectric memory such as FRAM (registered trademark) is used, the stored data can be erased by inputting a specific signal such as a clear signal. When the SRAM with a battery is used, the stored data can be erased by removing the battery, for example, in addition to inputting a specific signal. Alternatively, the storage data transmission method may be different between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. For example, the storage data of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A is transmitted by the serial communication method, and the storage data of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is transmitted by the parallel communication method. The combination of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B and the serial communication method and the parallel communication method can be arbitrarily changed. In this case, as the serial communication method, communication data corresponding to the serial communication standard having a faster communication speed than the parallel communication method may be transmitted / received, or the serial communication standard having a slower communication speed than the parallel communication method may be used. Corresponding communication data may be transmitted and received. Regardless of the serial communication standard, the transmission speed of the stored data may be different depending on the configuration of the data line (whether or not it is shared, etc.), the hardware configuration of the communication circuit, or a combination thereof. As described above, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B are different in the method of realizing the backup function, the point that the forming material of the memory cell is different, the method of erasing the stored data, and the storage data. Both storage units may be configured as different storage devices in that the transmission method or the transmission speed of the stored data is different. In addition, the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be configured as storage devices in which the storage units are different from each other due to any difference. In the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the storage data capacity, the method of realizing the backup function, the material forming the memory cell, the method of erasing the stored data, and any other device configuration and storage function. Some or all of them may be configured as a common storage device. The first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be freely combined in terms of configuration and function.

The first backup storage unit 44AK11A can retain the stored contents without using a backup power supply, for example, when it is configured by using FRAM (registered trademark). In this case, the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can hold the stored contents by using the backup power supply, for example, when it is configured by using the SRAM with a battery. In such a configuration, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B may be partially or wholly stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. When a part of the log information is stored, the target log information is based on the update frequency, the amount of update data, the importance of the data, the target part, the target control, a combination of some or all of them, and the like. , It may be decided in advance. In a storage device capable of holding stored contents using a backup power supply, the stored data is erased when the backup power supply is lost. Therefore, by storing the stored data of the storage device that can retain the stored contents using the backup power supply in the storage device that can retain the stored contents without using the backup power supply, the storage data can be surely lost. Can be prevented.

Whether to display on the maintenance history screen depending on whether the log information is stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. The setting may be different. For example, the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A can be displayed on the maintenance history screen, while the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. May be set not to be displayed. Even in this case, if the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is also stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, substantially all the log information can be stored. It can be displayed on the maintenance history screen. However, the log information stored in the log area of the second backup storage unit 44AK11B is not a read target when the maintenance history screen is displayed, and therefore the log information stored in the log area of the first backup storage unit 44AK11A. The handling is different from. Not limited to the display of the maintenance history screen, the setting of whether or not to read the log information when performing arbitrary output differs between the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and the second backup storage unit 44AK11B. May be good. As described above, in the range of the log information stored in the log area of either the first backup storage unit 44AK11A or the second backup storage unit 44AK11B, the limit is that the log information is not read when the output is performed. Restrictions may be provided. On the other hand, in the range of log information stored in the other log area, it suffices to be a read target when outputting.

The configurations and functions of the effect control board 12 and the backup memory board 14 in the above embodiment include the first effect control board 44AK12A provided with the first control unit 44AK10A and the first backup storage unit 44AK11A, the second control unit 44AK10B, and the like. It is realized by a configuration divided into a second effect control board 44AK12B provided with a second backup storage unit 44AK11B. In this case, for example, a separate developer shares the development of the configuration and functions included in the first effect control board 44AK12A and the development of the configurations and functions provided in the second effect control board 44AK12B, and proceeds in parallel. be able to. As a result, the burden of development work can be reduced and an increase in manufacturing cost can be prevented.

(Explanation of feature 45AK)
FIG. 22 shows a setting example of an inspection designation command related to the feature unit 45AK. The inspection specification command is included in a plurality of test commands received when executing a backup inspection process, for example. FIG. 22A shows a setting example 45AK01 of an inspection designation command capable of specifying an inspection output unit and a communication method. The inspection output unit may specify a connector to be used as the inspection signal output unit by selecting from, for example, connectors 152 to 156. The inspection output unit may be capable of inputting / outputting inspection signals and outputting read signals corresponding to backup data. The communication method may be parallel or serial, and in the case of serial, serial communication standards such as UART, SPI, and I2C may be selected and specified. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK01, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 are prepared in advance. The plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may differ from the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 and the designated contents of the communication method.

The connector 152 is connected to the effect control relay board 17 by wiring, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the driver circuit mounted on the driver board 19, the effect motor 60, and the effect LED 61. The connector 153 is connected to the lamp output board 13 by wiring, and can output a control signal for an electronic component such as a driver circuit mounted on the lamp output board 13. The connector 154 is connected to the backup memory board 14 by wiring, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as the RTC201, the serial communication circuit 202, and the backup data memories 210A to 210D mounted on the backup memory board 14. The connector 155 is connected to the effect data memory board 16 by wiring, and can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as a plurality of effect data memories mounted on the effect data memory board 16. In this way, the connectors 152 to 155 can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components. On the other hand, the connectors 152 to 155 are designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, so that the backup data reading signal indicating the log information read from the log area is read. It is possible to output a read signal according to the stored information. Since the connector 156 is wired and connected to the inspection device of the pachinko gaming machine 1, no control signal for the electronic component is output. On the other hand, the connector 156 can output a read signal according to the stored information, such as a read signal of backup data indicating the log information read from the log area. For example, the connector 156 becomes an output terminal of a read signal according to the log information by being designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4.

The inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 that can be designated by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 may include a part of the connectors 152 to 156 or may include all of the connectors 152 to 156. Further, the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 may include a connector common to each other, or may include a connector different from other inspection output units. For example, the effect relay wiring connector 152 can input and output a plurality of types of control signals and detection signals according to the specifications of various circuits mounted on the effect control relay board 17, the audio output board 18, and the driver board 19. It may be configured and included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4. On the other hand, for example, the connector 153 for frame lamp wiring is included in the inspection output unit 45AKC1 of the inspection designation command 45AKA1 which is configured to be able to input and output parallel signals and specifies parallel as a communication method. On the other hand, the connector 153 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA2 to 45AKA4 in which one of the serial communication standards is specified as the communication method. Further, for example, the backup wiring connector 154 is configured to be capable of inputting and outputting signals conforming to the SPI serial communication standard, and the inspection output unit 45AKC3 of the inspection designation command 45AKA3 in which the SPI serial communication standard is specified as the communication method. include. On the other hand, the connector 154 is not included in the inspection output units 45AKC1, 45AKC2, 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1, 45AKA2, 45AKA4 in which the serial signal standard of parallel or UART or I2C is specified as the communication method. As described above, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include a connector 152 capable of outputting signals by a plurality of signal methods and connectors 153 and 154 capable of outputting signals by a specific signal method. May include. Further, the connectors 152 to 156 that can be designated as the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 of the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 output the connectors 152 to 155 that can output control signals for a plurality of electronic components and the control signals for the electronic components. It may include a connector 156 which is not used. By designating the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 with the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4, a signal output unit corresponding to a plurality of types of received information can be selected from a plurality of different signal output units such as connectors 152 to 156. Then, inspection information corresponding to the inspection signal, such as a backup data read signal, can be output.

The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 can execute various lottery processes related to the presence / absence of the effect and the effect mode, such as a lottery process for the advance notice effect. Based on the lottery result by such lottery processing, control signals corresponding to various control information are output. For example, when it is decided to execute a specific advance notice effect as a result of the lottery of the advance notice effect, the control signal for reading the pattern data of the advance notice effect control pattern corresponding to the advance notice effect is a connector for the effect data wiring. It is output from 155 and transmitted to the effect data memory board 16 via the effect data wiring. In this case, a control signal (voice signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R and a control signal for controlling the driving state of the effect motor 60 according to the pattern data of the read advance notice effect control pattern. (Drive control signal) and the like are output from the effect relay wiring connector 152 and transmitted to the effect control relay board 17 via the effect relay wiring. Further, a control signal (illumination signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is output from the connector 153 for frame lamp wiring and transmitted to the lamp output board via the frame lamp wiring. On the other hand, the backup wiring connector 154 can output control signals for electronic components such as backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14, and this control signal is a lottery result by lottery processing. It is not output based on. As described above, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components include connectors 152, 153, 155 capable of outputting control signals based on the lottery result, and connectors 154 different from these. There is.

The connectors 152, 153, and 155 may output control signals based on the lottery result and may output control signals not based on the lottery result. As an example, when a customer waiting demo designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, control signals for controlling the demonstration effect without executing the lottery process are output from the connectors 152, 153, 155 and the like. Demonstration. Of these, the connector 152 for the effect relay wiring is a control signal (audio signal) for controlling the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R and a control signal (drive control signal) for controlling the drive state of the effect motor 60. It is possible to output a control signal according to the control information of the speakers 8L and 8R as the effect device, the effect motor 60, and the effect LED 61. The connector 153 for the frame lamp wiring can output a control signal corresponding to the control information of the game effect lamp 9 as an effect device, such as a control signal (illumination signal) for controlling the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. is there. On the other hand, the effect data wiring connector 155 can output a control signal corresponding to control information of an electronic component different from the effect device, such as a control signal for controlling the read process of the effect data memory. Further, the backup wiring connector 154 can output a control signal according to control information of an electronic component different from the effect device, such as a control signal for controlling the read process and the write process of the backup data memories 210A to 210D. Is. As described above, the connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components are the connectors 152 and 153 capable of outputting control signals according to the control information of the effect device, and the control signals for electronic components other than the effect device. Includes connectors 154 and 155 capable of outputting.

FIG. 22B shows a setting example 45AK02 of an inspection designation command capable of specifying inspection output data. The inspection output data can be specified by selecting a part or all of the data stored in the log areas of the backup data memories 210A to 210D provided on the backup memory board 14 as backup data indicating the log information. Anything is fine. The inspection output data is output from the connector designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4 by the inspection designation commands 45AKA1 to 45AKA4 among the connectors 152 to 156. As the inspection designation command in the setting example 45AK02, a plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are prepared in advance. The inspection output data of the plurality of inspection designation commands 45AKB1 to 45AKB12 are different.

The inspection designation command 45AKB1 designates system data as inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB2 designates the effect control error data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation 45 command AKB3 designates the player history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB4 designates the received command data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB5 designates the change time data at the time of setting as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB6 designates the power saving setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB7 designates the current time setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB8 designates the power off time data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB9 designates the store name setting data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB10 designates the effect output amount data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB11 designates the effect history data as the inspection output data. The inspection designation command 45AKB12 designates all stored data as inspection output data.

The backup data that can be output by designating the output data for inspection may indicate information about a plurality of electronic components or may indicate game-related information related to the game. For example, when the effect control error data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB2, the backup data including the effect control error data can be output, and the error generated in the electronic parts including the effect device can be specified. Backup data is output.

On the other hand, when the player history data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB3, the backup data including the player history data can be output, and whether an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic components has occurred. Regardless of whether or not, the backup data at the time of updating the updated data related to the player is output. When the received command data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB4, the backup data including the received command data can be output regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred. The backup data at the time of receiving the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 is output. When the store name setting data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB9, the backup data including the store name setting data can be output regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred. Instead, the backup data when the name of the store corresponding to the amusement park is set is output. When the system data is specified as the inspection output data by the inspection designation command 45AKB1, the backup data including the system data can be output. The backup data including the system data is stored regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts has occurred and the backup data at the time of data update due to the occurrence of an event corresponding to a plurality of electronic parts. Includes backup data when updating data. By outputting the backup data at the time of data update for the system data, the backup data when an event corresponding to multiple electronic components occurs and regardless of whether or not an event corresponding to multiple electronic components occurs. The backup data at the time of data update is output. In this way, it is possible to output information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information that is not related to electronic parts or games, according to the specified contents of the inspection output data by the inspection designation command. .. It should be noted that the information about the electronic component is not limited to the specified content of the inspection output data by the inspection designation command, and the information about the electronic component can be obtained according to an arbitrary detection result such as the detection result of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. , Game-related information related to the game, or output information such as electronic parts and general information unrelated to the game may be switchable. It is not limited to the detection result, but the output information such as information about electronic parts, game-related information about games, or general information that is not related to electronic parts or games can be switched according to arbitrary control or processing. All you need is.

(About transformation and application)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to be able to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may not perform variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is opened from the closed state (second state) (second state). When the game ball that has changed to the first state) and entered the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) among a plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be configured to be.

In the above embodiment, the "ratio" and "probability" at which various decisions are made are 0% (never determined) or 100% (always), for example, 70:30. It may be set so that it will not be (determined), or at least the probability of one of the determination results will be 0% (never determined) or 100% (always determined). It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, if the ratio of one of a plurality of decision results to be a decision result is higher than the ratio of other decision results, the ratio of one decision result is It may be included that it is 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of 1 as the determination result is 100%, the ratio of other determination results is 0%. Further, when the ratio of other decision results is 0%, if the ratio of 1 decision result is a predetermined ratio other than 100% but not 0%, the ratio of 1 decision result is the other decision result. It will be higher than the ratio.

In addition, various effects including the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the effect LED. The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants.

The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result. A variable display device (a variable display device) that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or credits) for one game and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each. One game ends when the display results of (for example, multiple reels, etc.) are derived and displayed, and prizes are awarded according to the display results (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.). Is a game machine that can generate. In such a slot machine, the hardware resources including the effect movable mechanism provided on the front side of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process cooperate with each other to perform the pachinko machine shown in the above embodiment. It may be configured to have all or a part of the features of the game machine 1.

Slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the game value, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using game balls as the game value and credits as the game value. It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. For example, when setting 3 as the bet number, 15 game balls are used for the bet number. Corresponds to the one that sets. The pachinko game machine 1 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and for example, a plurality of types such as medals and game balls. It may be possible to use the value for games together. For example, a slot machine can play a game by setting a bet number using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and a plurality of medals, game balls, etc. are generated depending on the occurrence of a prize. Any of the types of gaming value may be payable.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form in which the program and data are distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature section 41AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, which can control a plurality of electronic parts, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the game machine is stopped. However, it is provided with storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D, which can retain the stored contents and can store information about a plurality of electronic parts, and the control means is an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic parts. When the generation condition is satisfied, for example, a write process by the memory write processing unit 41AKAM10 can be executed as a write process for writing the information to the storage means, and the storage means includes, for example, the backup storage areas 41AKA11 to 41AKA13. A storage area such as the backup storage unit 41AKA1 in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written and a storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written are provided as one continuous area. For example, when the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition are satisfied, such as write prohibition when the writing flag 41AKF1 is on, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition is being executed, the other Do not execute the process of writing the information corresponding to the condition. As described above, during the execution of the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other is not executed, so that the conflict of the processing of writing the information is avoided. To. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied depending on the internal state of the control means, such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process of writing the information about the electronic component to the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition depends on the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It can be established according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generation condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is prioritized over the case where the second generation condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. When the embedded processing is executed, the priority of the writing process is set while avoiding the conflict in the writing process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition is being executed, for example, the writing flag 41AKF1. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, process conflicts can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When a writing condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control means writes game-related information different from the information related to a plurality of electronic components to the storage means, for example, a backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. Etc. may be feasible. In this way, if the process of writing the game-related information can be executed in response to the writing conditions different from the generation conditions, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, an output means capable of outputting a control signal for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 152 to 155 and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means may be provided. Since such an output means can output a control signal and a read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

A first output means such as connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means unlike the first output means, for example, a connector 156. A second output means such as may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of Problem Solving Means and Effects of Feature 42AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, which can control a plurality of electronic parts, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the game machine is stopped. Even if the storage contents can be retained and information about a plurality of electronic components can be stored, for example, a storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D is provided, and the control means is an event corresponding to the plurality of electronic components. When the generation condition is satisfied, for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 can be executed as a writing process for writing the information to the storage means, and the storage means can execute, for example, the backup storage area 42AKA111 to 42AKA113. A storage area in which the first information corresponding to the first generation condition is written, such as the backup storage unit 42AKA11 including the backup storage unit 42AKA11, the backup storage unit 42AKA21 including the backup storage area 42AKA211 to 42AKA213, and the backup storage unit 42AKA31 including the backup storage area 42AKA311-42AKA313. , The storage area in which the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written is provided as a different area, and the first generation condition and the second generation condition such as the memory writing process by the memory writing processing units 42AKM11 to 42AKM13 are provided. When is satisfied, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other condition can be executed even during the execution of the process of writing the information corresponding to one condition. In this way, while the process of writing the information corresponding to one of the first occurrence condition and the second occurrence condition is being executed, the process of writing the information corresponding to the other can be executed, so that the efficiency of the process of writing the information is improved. .. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The generation condition may be satisfied depending on the internal state of the control means, such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2. In this way, when the generation condition corresponding to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing process of writing the information about the electronic component to the storage means is executed to store the information about the electronic component including the control means. be able to. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first occurrence condition can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means such as CPU internal error 41AKC1 and VDP error interrupt 41AKC2, and the second occurrence condition depends on the control means such as the effect control error determination 41AKC3. It can be established according to the processing result. For example, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the first occurrence condition is satisfied, the writing process is executed with priority over the case where the second occurrence condition is satisfied. It may be possible. In this way, when the first generation condition that can be satisfied according to the internal state of the control means is satisfied, the writing is prioritized over the case where the second generation condition that can be satisfied according to the processing result by the control means is satisfied. When the embedded processing is executed, the priority of the writing process is set while avoiding the conflict in the writing process of the information about the electronic component. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the first occurrence condition or the second occurrence condition is satisfied multiple times, the next condition is set according to the execution information indicating that the process of writing the information corresponding to the previous condition is being executed, for example, the writing flag 41AKF1. The process of writing the corresponding information may be restricted. If the process of writing information is restricted according to such execution information, process conflicts can be easily avoided. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

In the writing process, the same information may be stored in a plurality of storage areas such as backup storage units 41AKA1 to 41AKA3. In this way, if the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas, the reliability of the information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When a writing condition different from the generation condition is satisfied, the control means writes game-related information different from the information related to a plurality of electronic components to the storage means, for example, a backup process according to the setting of the backup control table 120T. Etc. may be feasible. In this way, if the process of writing the game-related information can be executed in response to the writing conditions different from the generation conditions, various information can be stored and managed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, an output means capable of outputting a control signal for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 152 to 155 and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means may be provided. Since such an output means can output a control signal and a read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

A first output means such as connectors 152 to 155 capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components, and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means unlike the first output means, for example, a connector 156. A second output means such as may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 43AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, which can control a plurality of electronic parts, for example, a control means such as a production control microcomputer 120, and power supply to the game machine is stopped. However, it is provided with storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D, which can retain the stored contents and can store information about a plurality of electronic parts, and the control means is provided when the writing condition is satisfied. As a writing process for writing information to the storage means, for example, a writing process by the memory writing processing units 43AKM11 and 43AKM12 can be executed, and when writing the first information corresponding to the first generation condition, for example, the backup storage unit. When the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas such as 43AKA11 to 43AKA13 and the second information corresponding to the second generation condition is written, the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas such as the backup storage unit 43AKA21. To memorize. In this way, by providing a case where the same information is stored in a plurality of storage areas and a case where the information is stored in a storage area smaller than the plurality of storage areas, various types of information corresponding to information on a plurality of electronic components are provided. Memory is done. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the storage information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas among a plurality of storage areas that store the same information as the first information, recovery is performed based on the storage information, for example, recovery by information processing at power-on. The process may be executable. In this way, since the recovery process is executed when the stored information is determined to be normal in a predetermined number of storage areas, the reliability of recovery based on the stored information is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When the stored information corresponding to the second information is determined to be abnormal, it may be possible to execute an initial process for setting the initial information, for example, setting an initial value by information processing at power-on. In this way, since the initial process for setting the initial information is executed, a problem when it is determined to be abnormal can be prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second generation condition may be satisfied less frequently than the first generation condition, for example, a backup condition when power saving is set. In this way, various memories are performed by providing the second generation condition that is less frequently satisfied. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second information may be setting information that can be set by the administrator of the game machine, such as power saving setting data. In this way, by storing the setting information that can be set by the administrator of the game machine, various storages are performed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, the connection wiring for connecting the control means and the storage means, such as the wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220, and the terminals TM01 and TM02 of the connector 154 and the terminal TM11 of the connector 220, for example. , The wiring for confirming the connection between the control means and the storage means, such as the wiring connected to the TM12, may be provided. In this way, by providing the connection confirmation wiring that can confirm the connection state, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, an output means capable of outputting a control signal for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 152 to 155 and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means may be provided. Since such an output means can output a control signal and a read signal, it is possible to prevent the device configuration from becoming complicated and the manufacturing cost from increasing. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, a first output means capable of outputting control signals for a plurality of electronic components such as connectors 152 to 155, and a read signal corresponding to the stored information of the storage means unlike the first output means such as the connector 156 can be output. A second output means may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of Problem Solving Means and Effects of Feature 44AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, such as a first control unit 44AK10A, a first control means capable of controlling a first electronic component, and a second control unit 44AK10B, for example. , The second control means capable of controlling the second electronic component, the stored contents can be retained even when the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and the information regarding the first control means and the second control means can be stored, for example. It is provided with storage means such as backup data memories 210A to 210D, and when a writing condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a writing process of writing information to the storage means, and the storage means stores information about the first control means. Possible, for example, a first storage means such as the first backup storage unit 44AK11A and a second storage means such as the second backup storage unit 44AK11B which can store information about the second control means unlike the first storage means. And include. As described above, unlike the first storage means that can store information about the first control means, by providing the second storage means that can store the information about the second control means, various storages according to the control means are provided. Is done. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

When writing the information about the first control means, for example, a CPU exception event occurrence process or a VDP error interrupt process may be executed as a process different from the case where the information about the second control means is written. By executing different processes in this way, various memories are performed according to the control means. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first storage means can store information about an event that occurs according to the first electronic component, such as log information including exception event information of the CPU 131, and the second storage means stores, for example, VDP error interrupt information of the VDP 140. Information on an event that occurs according to the second electronic component, such as log information including the information, may be stored. In this way, by storing the information about the occurrence event corresponding to the different electronic component, various storage according to the electronic component is performed. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first control means can be installed as a substrate different from the first storage means, for example, on the first effect control board 12A, and the second control means can be installed as a substrate different from the second storage means, for example, the second effect. It may be installed on the control board 12B or the like. By installing the control means and the storage means on different substrates in this way, maintenance work becomes easy and a flexible device configuration becomes possible. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The first storage means can hold the stored contents by using a backup power source, for example, when a SRAM with a battery is used, and the second storage means uses a backup power source, for example, when FRAM (registered trademark) is used. The stored contents can be retained without being used, and the second storage means may be able to store a part of the stored contents in the first storage means. In this way, a part of the stored contents in the first storage means is also stored in the second storage means, so that the certainty of the memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, the connection wiring for connecting the first control means and the second control means and the storage means, such as the wiring connected to the terminals TM03 and TM04 of the connector 154 and the terminals TM13 and TM14 of the connector 220, and the terminal TM01 of the connector 154, for example. Connection confirmation wiring that can confirm the connection state between the first control means and the second control means and the storage means, such as the wiring connected to the terminals TM11 and TM12 of the TM02 and the connector 220, may be provided. In this way, by providing the connection confirmation wiring that can confirm the connection state, the certainty of memory is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, a display means such as an image display device 5 may be provided, and the storage information of the second storage means may be output by the display of the display means, for example, when displaying the maintenance history screen. By outputting the stored information by display in this way, it becomes easy to confirm the stored contents. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

For example, a first output means capable of outputting a control signal for a first electronic component and a second electronic component such as a connector 152 to 155, and a first output means such as a connector 156, which can output a control signal, and a read according to the storage information of the storage means unlike the first output means such as the connector 156. A second output means capable of outputting a signal may be provided. As described above, if the first output means can output the control signal and the second output means can output the read signal, confusion of the output signals is prevented. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature 45AK)
A game machine capable of playing a game, for example, a pachinko game machine 1, which can control electronic components, for example, a control means such as a microcomputer 120 for effect control, and a connector capable of outputting a control signal, for example. The output means includes output means such as 152 to 155, and the output means can output a control signal corresponding to at least a part of the control information based on the lottery result by the control means, for example, the first such as connectors 152, 153, 155. The output means includes, for example, a connector 154 as a second output means different from the first output means. As described above, by providing the second output means different from the first output means capable of outputting the control signal based on the lottery result, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second output means outputs a control signal via a path different from that of the first output means in the same substrate as the first output means, for example, when a connector 154 different from the connectors 152, 153, and 155 is installed. It may be possible. In this way, since the control signals are output via different paths, the certainty of various signal outputs is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal according to the control information of the effect device, for example, when the connector 152 is designated as one of the inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. In this way, by outputting the control signal corresponding to the control information of the effect device, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The second output means may be capable of outputting a control signal having a signal method different from that of the first output means, such as a communication method according to the output unit setting example 45AK01. By outputting control signals of different signal methods in this way, various signals are output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

A mounting member such as a connector 156 capable of mounting a connecting means to which the inspection device of the game machine is connected may be provided, and the mounting member may be soldered when the connecting means is not mounted. By performing such a soldering treatment, disconnection due to oxidation or corrosion is prevented when the material is not mounted. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The control means can execute, for example, a backup inspection process as an inspection process for outputting inspection information related to electronic components based on the received information, and responds to a plurality of types of received information such as inspection output units 45AKC1 to 45AKC4. Inspection information may be output by different output means. In this way, the inspection information is output by the output means according to the received information, so that the flexibility of information output is enhanced. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

The output means may be capable of outputting information on electronic components such as effect control error data and game-related information on games such as system data and received command data. In this way, by outputting the information about the electronic components and the game-related information about the game, various information is output. This makes it possible to manage the information appropriately.

(Explanation of feature 95AK)
The contents of the above-described embodiment and any of the above-mentioned feature units 41AK to 45AK may be changed to the feature portion 95AK. Hereinafter, the feature portion 95AK will be described.

(Backup storage, backup data, etc.)
As shown in FIG. 23-1, the feature unit 95AK provides a 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to a 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 and a second backup storage unit 95AK004.

The 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 is provided in the backup data memory 210A, and includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK001A, 95AK001B, 95AK001C, and the like as log areas.

The first-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 is provided in the backup data memory 210B, and includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK002A, 95AK002B, 95AK002C, and the like as log areas.

The first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 is provided in the backup data memory 210C, and includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK003A, 95AK003B, 95AK003C ... As a log area.

The second backup storage unit 95AK004 is provided in the backup data memory 210D, and includes a plurality of backup storage areas including backup storage areas 95AK004A, 95AK004B, 95AK004C ... As a log area.

The first-first backup storage unit 95AK001 to the first-third backup storage unit 95AK003 and the second backup storage unit 95AK004 are among a plurality of backup data backed up by the above-described embodiment and feature units 41AK to 45AK. At least a part is stored (backed up) as either manufacturer confirmation data or store confirmation data. It is optional to divide the plurality of backup data into either the manufacturer confirmation data or the store confirmation data, and the following is an example.

The manufacturer confirmation data is data confirmed by the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and includes, for example, defect identification data. The defect identification data is data for identifying a defect that causes the failure by checking the behavior of the failed pachinko game machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 fails. (1) Backup data with the CPU exception event occurrence as a backup condition (backup data created and backed up by the CPU exception event occurrence processing; also referred to as CPU exception event occurrence data), and (2) VDP error interruption request generation. There is backup data as a backup condition (backup data created / backed up by the VDP error interrupt process. Also referred to as VDP error data). Further, the defect identification data includes (3) system data, (4) received command data, (5) effect output amount data, and (6) effect history, which are created and backed up by the backup process during the effect control. There is data etc. The manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 collects the malfunctioning pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5) and analyzes the log information indicated by the data. , The behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the failure can be specified, and the defect that causes the failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be searched for by the specified behavior.

The manufacturer confirmation data may include other data. For example, the manufacturer confirmation data may include player history data, store name setting data, and the like. From these data, it is possible to grasp the tendency of the players who played the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the tendency of the players in each region, and the like.

The manufacturer confirmation data is created by the first occurrence event information creation processing unit (not shown) and the first backup by the first memory writing processing unit (not shown) in the same manner as the feature unit 41AK and the like. It is written in the storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003. The first occurrence event information creation processing unit and the first memory writing processing unit are from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, similarly to the occurrence event information creation processing unit and the memory writing processing unit such as the feature unit 41AK. It is composed of the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the read program.

When any of the backup conditions of each data of the manufacturer confirmation data is satisfied, the first occurrence event information creation processing unit uses the backup data indicating the log information corresponding to the satisfaction of the backup conditions as the manufacturer confirmation data. And store it in the first backup data buffer provided in the predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (for example, each process of FIGS. 8A and 8B, step S79, etc.). The second memory write processing unit reads the backup data (manufacturer confirmation data) stored in the first backup data buffer one by one and transfers it to the backup memory board 14 (write like the feature unit 41AK). The transfer or writing of backup data may be restricted by turning on / off the medium flag 41AKF1).

The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores the transferred backup data in each of the 1-1 backup storage units 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage units 95AK003 (the same data is stored in each storage unit). Specifically, the memory controller 200 stores (backs up) the same manufacturer confirmation data in each of the backup storage area 95AK001A, backup storage area 95AK002A, and backup storage area 95AK003A, and similarly, the backup storage areas 95AK001B to 95AK003B, respectively. , The same manufacturer confirmation data is stored one by one in each of the backup storage areas 95AK001C to 95AK003C (sequentially stored from the top of the backup storage area in FIG. 23-1). In this way, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up with a multiplicity of 3.

The log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 (image display device 5) or the like. The manufacturer confirmation data is read by the manufacturer (outside the store) using, for example, a data reading device connected to the connectors 152 to 156 (such as a dedicated reading device equipped with a jig dedicated to the connectors 152 to 156). (You may read it using the inspection specification command of 45AK). As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data can be read out by using the connector for other purposes.

The store confirmation data is data indicating log information that can be confirmed by a staff member of the store (game hall) where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed (particularly, data displayed on a display means such as an image display device 5 by a predetermined operation). On the other hand, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data cannot be confirmed by a display means or the like, so it is more difficult to confirm than the log information indicated by the store confirmation data). 14, FIG. 15) and data indicating information (log information) displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen (FIG. 16). As the store confirmation data, here, based on the above-mentioned (1) production control error data ("switch abnormality error", "prize ball abnormality error", "magnet error", "illegal winning error", etc. (Data), (2) Set value change time data (It is good that the changed setting value and change start time or end time data are also included) ("The setting change has been completed", "The setting change has started." , (Data that is the basis of setting change / confirmation history, etc.), (3) Setting value confirmation time data (It is desirable that the setting value data at the time of setting value confirmation is also included) ("Setting confirmation is completed", Based on "Setting confirmation has started", data that is the basis of setting change / confirmation history, etc.), (4) Power saving setting data, (5) Current time change data ("Time has been set", etc. Data) and (6) Power off time data (data that is the basis of "power off" and the like). The store confirmation data includes error information data (effect control error data), data that can identify the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the store staff (set value change time data, set value confirmation time data, etc.). May be included. The date and time may be identifiable for each time data (the same applies hereinafter).

The backup data includes (1) RAM clear time data (data that is the basis of "RAM clear", etc.) indicating the RAM clear time with RAM clear as the backup condition, and (2) power on with power on as the backup condition. Power-on time data (data that is the basis of "power-on" etc.), (3) Restriction of movement of the accessory when the accessory is provided (for example, when the accessory is operated, the combination The time (including the date and time; the same shall apply hereinafter) and contents of the setting change are shown with the setting change of the setting change as a backup condition (such as prohibition of movement of the accessory when an object may hit the equipment around the pachinko game machine 1). The first setting change data, (4) the second setting change data indicating the time and contents of the setting change with the setting change such as the volume and the execution frequency of various effects by the command from the store management computer as a backup condition, (5). ) A predetermined condition related to the game such as "probability change failure" may be used as a backup condition, and at least one such as game progress data indicating the establishment of the condition and the time may be prepared and included in the store confirmation data.

In addition, in the feature unit 95AK, the CPU exception event occurrence data and the VDP error data are not included in the store confirmation data (therefore, they are not displayed on the maintenance mode history screen or the setting change / confirmation history screen). "VDP error", "CPU exception event" in FIG. 15 and the like are not displayed). This is because these data do not need to be confirmed by store employees. On the other hand, specific backup data such as power saving setting data may be included in both the manufacturer confirmation data and the store confirmation data.

The store confirmation data is created by the second occurrence event information creation processing unit (not shown), and is written to the second backup storage unit 95AK004 by the second memory writing processing unit (not shown). The second occurrence event information creation processing unit and the second memory writing processing unit are from one or both of the external ROM 121 and the internal ROM 132, similarly to the occurrence event information creation processing unit and the memory writing processing unit such as the feature unit 41AK. It is composed of the CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 that executes the read program.

When any of the backup conditions of each data of the store confirmation data is satisfied, the second occurrence event information creation processing unit creates backup data indicating the log information corresponding to the satisfaction of the backup conditions as the store confirmation data. , Stored in a second backup data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (for example, step S79). The second memory write processing unit reads the backup data (manufacturer confirmation data) stored in the second backup data buffer one by one and transfers it to the backup memory board 14 (write like the feature unit 41AK). The transfer or writing of backup data may be restricted by turning on / off the medium flag 41AKF1).

The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores the transferred backup data in the second backup storage unit 95AK004. Specifically, the memory controller 200 stores (backs up) store confirmation data in the backup storage area 95AK004A, and similarly stores the store confirmation data in the backup storage area 95AK004B, the backup storage area 95AK004C, .... It is stored one by one (stored sequentially from the top of the backup storage area in FIG. 23-1). In this way, the store confirmation data is backed up with a multiplicity of 1.

(Backup process)
The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may perform the backup process shown in FIG. 23-2 at an appropriate timing. The backup process is executed for each timer interrupt. In the backup process, for example, during the effect control of step S79, during the backup process, after the process of creating the backup data based on the establishment of the backup condition and storing the backup data in the first or second backup data buffer. It is a process to be executed (a process to be executed even when the backup condition is not satisfied), and is executed by the CPU 131 functioning as the first or second memory write processing unit.

In the backup process shown in FIG. 23-2, the CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) first determines whether to back up the store confirmation data (step 95AKS001). The determination is made based on whether the store confirmation data as backup data is stored in the second backup data buffer (if the store confirmation data is stored, it is determined that the store confirmation data is backed up). In addition, it can be said that the backup condition for backing up the store confirmation data (log information) is satisfied (hereinafter, also referred to as the second backup condition).

When the store confirmation data is stored in the second backup data buffer, that is, when the store confirmation data is backed up (step 95AKS001: Yes), the CPU131 (second memory write processing unit) is the store confirmation data. Is written to the second backup storage unit 95AK004 (step 95AKS002). Specifically, the CPU 131 (second memory write processing unit) transfers the store confirmation data stored in the second backup data buffer to the backup memory board 14 together with a storage instruction in the second backup storage unit 95AK004. (The transferred store confirmation data is deleted from the second backup data buffer). The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred store confirmation data in the second backup storage unit 95AK004 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the store confirmation data has been backed up. If multiple store confirmation data are stored, all store confirmation data shall be transferred in order from the oldest storage (the store confirmation data originally has a small amount of data, so this method is used. (There is no problem even if there is)) In one backup process, one store confirmation data may be transferred.

When the store confirmation data is not stored (step 95AKS001; No), or after step 95AKS002, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) determines whether to back up the manufacturer confirmation data (step). 95AKS003). The determination is made based on whether the manufacturer confirmation data as backup data is stored in the first backup data buffer (if the manufacturer confirmation data is stored, it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up. ). In addition, it can be said that the backup condition for backing up the manufacturer confirmation data (log information) is satisfied (hereinafter, also referred to as the first backup condition).

When the manufacturer confirmation data is stored in the first backup data buffer, that is, when the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up (step 95AKS003: Yes), the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) is the first. Determines whether the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the backup data buffer (if there are multiple data, the data stored in the past. The same applies to the backup process) has been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001. (Step 95AKS004). The determination is, for example, the state of the first written flag (flag that is turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001) provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133. Is done by.

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (step 95AKS004; No) because the first written flag is off or the like, the CPU 131 (first memory write process) Unit) performs a writing process for writing the manufacturer confirmation data to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (step 95AKS005). Specifically, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) stores the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer in the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 together with the backup memory board 14 (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically once, but when the amount of manufacturer confirmation data is larger than the predetermined standard, or when split backup is set for the manufacturer confirmation data, the CPU131 The (first memory writing processing unit) divides the manufacturer confirmation data and transfers a part of the data to the backup memory board 14. In this case, information that can identify the transferred data is held in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133, and the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) refers to the information in step 95AKS005 that is executed again thereafter. And transfer the rest of the data. In addition, the storage instruction includes information to the effect that the manufacturer confirmation data is divided and transferred, and the number of transfers. When all the manufacturer confirmation data to be written is transferred, the first written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK003 according to the storage instruction (manufacturer confirmation data is divided into a plurality of times). When it is transferred, it is stored in the multiple times). As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001.

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has been written to the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (step 95AKS004; Yes) when the first written flag is on or the like, the CPU 131 (first memory write). The processing unit) determines whether the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer has been written to the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS006). The determination is, for example, the state of the second written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (a flag that is turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002). Is done by.

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS006; No) because the second written flag is off or the like, the CPU 131 (first memory write process) Unit) performs a writing process for writing the manufacturer confirmation data to the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS007). Specifically, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) stores the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer in the backup memory board 14 together with an instruction to store the manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002. (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically once, but when the divided transfer is performed in step 95AKS005, the manufacturer confirmation data is divided and transferred by the same process as in step 95AKS005. After the transfer of the manufacturer confirmation data to be written is completed, the second written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data has been backed up in the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002.

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has been written to the 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (step 95AKS006; Yes) when the second written flag is on or the like, the CPU 131 (first memory write). The processing unit) determines whether the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer has been written to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS008). The determination is, for example, the state of the third written flag provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (a flag that is turned on when the manufacturer confirmation data has been transferred to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003). Is done by.

When it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has not been written to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS008; No) because the third written flag is off or the like, the CPU 131 (first memory write process) Unit) performs a writing process for writing the manufacturer confirmation data to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS009). Specifically, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) stores the manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer in the backup memory board 14 together with an instruction to store the manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003. (Note that the manufacturer confirmation data remains in the first backup data buffer even after the transfer). The transfer is basically once, but when the divided transfer is performed in step 95AKS005, the manufacturer confirmation data is divided and transferred by the same process as in step 95AKS005. After the transfer of the manufacturer confirmation data to be written is completed, the third written flag is turned on. The memory controller 200 of the backup memory board 14 stores (writes) the transferred manufacturer confirmation data in the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 in accordance with the storage instruction. As a result, the manufacturer confirmation data has been backed up in the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003.

When the third written flag is on or the like and it is determined that the manufacturer confirmation data has been written to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 (step 95AKS008; Yes), the manufacturer confirmation data Since the backup to all of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 has been completed, the CPU 131 (first memory write processing unit) sets the end of the backup (step). 95AKS010). The termination setting deletes the manufacturer confirmation data (the oldest manufacturer confirmation data stored in the first backup data buffer) from the first backup data buffer, and also deletes the first written flag to the third written flag. Turn off the flag. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process for the manufacturer confirmation data from being performed in the backup process by the next timer interrupt.

After any of the processes of steps 95AKS005, 95AKS007, 95AKS009, and 95AKS010, or when the manufacturer confirmation data is not backed up (step 95AKS003: No), the backup process ends.

As described above, in the backup process, first, the backup of the store confirmation data is executed with priority, and then the backup of the manufacturer confirmation data is executed. Therefore, the backup process (transfer or write process) of the store confirmation data is executed. ) Has a higher priority than the backup process (transfer or write process) of the manufacturer confirmation data. Further, the backup process (transfer or write process) of one store confirmation data is completed by the backup process of one timer interrupt, but the backup process (write process) of one manufacturer confirmation data is the first. -1 Backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 Since the backup processing of three timer interrupts of the backup storage unit 95AK003 is required at a minimum, the processing execution time of the backup processing (writing processing) of the store confirmation data is manufactured. It is shorter than the backup process (write process) of the vendor confirmation data.

(Power supply detection circuit 95AK010, etc.)
As shown in FIG. 23-3, a power failure detection circuit 95AK010 that supplies a power failure signal to the effect control microcomputer 120 may be provided. The power failure detection circuit 95AK010 is mounted on the effect control board 12 here, but may be mounted on a board outside the effect control board 12.

A DC voltage (driving voltage for driving the effect control microcomputer 120) from the power supply board is applied to the effect control board 12. The DC voltage is commonly applied to the effect control microcomputer 120 and the power failure detection circuit 95AK010. During normal operation, a voltage of 12 V is applied to the effect control microcomputer 120 and the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 as the DC voltage. The power failure detection circuit 95AK010 supplies a power failure signal to the effect control microcomputer 120 when the applied DC voltage is 8 V or less, and stops the operation of the effect control microcomputer 120.

For example, when the power is turned on, the DC voltage from the power supply board may gradually increase and become unstable, but the effect control microcomputer 120 may operate at, for example, 3V. In such a case, if the DC voltage exceeds 3 V in an unstable period in which the DC voltage is not stable after the power is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 120 starts operating at this point. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 continuously supplies the power failure signal to the effect control microcomputer 120 until the DC voltage exceeds 8 V (when it is 8 V or less), which is likely to be stable. It is possible to prevent the control microcomputer 120 from starting operation (so-called start-up for executing the initialization process and the like in step S21 of FIG. 7).

FIG. 23-4 shows a state when the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main board 11 and effect control board 12) provided with such a power failure detection circuit 95AK010 is reset (reset accompanied by power off and on). The power interruption signal is an active Low signal (a signal that becomes Low (ON) when the DC voltage is 8 V or less and becomes High (OFF) when it exceeds 8 V). The power failure signal may be set to Active High.

When the reset is performed at the timing of (a) in FIG. 23-4, the DC voltage supplied from the power supply board to the effect control board 12 (microcomputer 120 for effect control) drops and reaches 8 V (a). The power failure signal is started to be supplied from the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 at the timing. Assuming that the backup condition is satisfied by the start of supply, the first occurrence event information creation processing unit (CPU131) indicates backup data (including date and time information) indicating the start of reception of the power failure signal (including date and time information). Hereinafter, the power interruption signal reception start data is also created as manufacturer confirmation data, stored in the first backup data buffer, and transferred to the backup memory board 14 by the first memory writing processing unit (CPU131) for backup (hereinafter, also referred to as power failure signal reception start data). The power interruption signal reception start data may be backed up as store confirmation data or other data). The effect control microcomputer 120 to which the power interruption signal is supplied stops operating, and then the power is turned off when the DC voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage (a voltage at which the effect control microcomputer 120 cannot operate). That is, the effect control microcomputer 120 is inactive from the timing (a). Along with the reset operation, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply board to the main board 11 also drops, and the main board 11 also turns off (non-operates) at a predetermined timing.

After that, at the timing of (c), the power supply from the power supply board is restored, and the DC voltage supplied from the power supply board to the effect control board 12 gradually rises, but the DC voltage exceeds 8 V (d). A power failure signal is supplied until the timing. After the timing (d) when the DC voltage exceeds 8 V and the power interruption signal is turned off, the effect control microcomputer 120 starts operating. Further, at the timing of (d), assuming that the backup condition is satisfied by the end of reception of the power interruption signal, the first occurrence event information creation processing unit (CPU131) has log information indicating the end of reception of the power interruption signal (CPU131). Backup data indicating (including date and time information) (hereinafter, also referred to as interruption signal reception end data) is created as manufacturer confirmation data, stored in the first backup data buffer, and stored by the first memory write processing unit (CPU131). It is transferred to the backup memory board 14 and backed up (the power failure signal reception end data may be backed up as store confirmation data or other data). With the return of the power supply from the power supply board, the main board 11 also starts operation at a predetermined timing, and the effect control command (RAM clear notification command, setting change start command, etc.) at the time of power-on is the timing of (e). Is supplied to the effect control board 12.

FIG. 23-5 shows how the effect control microcomputer 120 (effect control board 12) was reset without the main board 11 being cut off (power off) or the like. The effect control microcomputer 120 restarts (resets) itself due to a difference in malfunction, such as poor communication between the CPU 131 and the VDP 130 or communication between the CPU 131 and the effect data memory board. Further, the effect control microcomputer 120 may be reset due to noise on the reset terminal, an accelerator error, or a program error. In such a case, even if the effect control microcomputer 120 changes from operating → non-operating → operating, the DC voltage from the power supply board does not change at 12V, the main board 11 continues to operate, and the power interruption signal is also off. It remains (remains unreceived).

When the entire pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 23-4 is reset (the same applies when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on) and when only the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 23-5 is reset. The former is different in that the power failure signal is received, but the latter is not received. That is, depending on whether or not the interruption signal reception start data and the interruption signal reception end data are backed up, the power-on mode of the effect control microcomputer 120 (the power is turned on by the normal power-on or reset of the entire pachinko gaming machine 1). Or is it a reset of only the effect control microcomputer 120)?

(Processing after the power of the microcomputer 120 for production control is turned on)
In response to (or after resetting) that the power of the effect control microcomputer 120 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the power failure detection circuit 95AK010 is turned on (a DC voltage that allows the CPU 131 to operate is applied), the CPU 131 , The process shown in FIG. 23-6 may be executed.

In the process of FIG. 23-6, the CPU 131 first monitors the power failure signal and determines whether or not a change in the power failure signal from on to off is detected (step 95AKS101). When it is detected (step 95AKS101; Yes), the process of backing up the power interruption signal reception end data is performed as described above (step 95AKS102).

When the change is not detected (step 95AKS101; Yes), after step 95AKS102, it is determined whether the power interruption signal is being received (step 95AKS103), and when it is being received (step 95AKS103; Yes). Return to step 95AK101. Therefore, as long as the power interruption signal is received, the subsequent processing is not performed, and the effect control microcomputer 120 does not start up.

When the power interruption signal is not being received (step 95AKS103; No), the CPU 131 determines whether there is a backup of the power interruption signal reception end data and the power interruption signal reception start data (step 95AKS104), and when there is a backup (step 95AKS104). Since the pachinko game machine 1 is reset (reset with power off and on) or the power is turned on (normal power ON) in 95AKS104; Yes), when the power is turned on from the main board 11. Waiting for the effect control command to be received (step 95AKS105), when the effect control command is received, backup data indicating log information at the time of turning on the power (for example, RAM clear time data at the time of receiving the RAM clear notification command, reception of the setting change start command) The time setting value change time data, the setting value confirmation time data at the time of receiving the setting confirmation start command, the power-on time data, etc.) are backed up to the second backup storage unit 95AK004 as store confirmation data (step 95AKS106).

After that, the received command data indicating the log information including the effect control command when the power is turned on from the main board 11 is backed up to each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 as the manufacturer confirmation data. (Step 95AKS107). After that, an initialization process (step S21) or the like is performed according to an effect control command from the main board 11 (when a power failure recovery designation command is received, a power failure recovery process is performed, etc.).

If there is no backup of the power interruption signal reception end data or the power interruption signal reception start data (step 95AKS104; No), only the effect control board 12 side (game control microcomputer 120) is reset, so that the CPU 131 , An initial screen (for example, an image notifying that only the effect control board 12 side is reset) is displayed on the image display device 5 via the VDP 140 (step 95AKS111), and the effect control board 12 side (for game control). Backup data indicating log information (including date and time information) indicating that only the microcomputer 120) has been reset is backed up as manufacturer confirmation data in 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003. (Step 95AKS112). After that, the initialization process (step S21) or the like is performed according to the fact that the effect control command at the time of turning on the power is not supplied from the main board 11 (for example, the effect execution is restarted based on the effect control command received thereafter).

If the CPU 131 receives a command other than the effect control command at the time of turning on the power in step 95AKS105, or if the effect control command cannot be received for a predetermined period after waiting for reception, the CPU 131 goes to the effect control board 12. Only the DC voltage of the main board 11 drops and is reset, and it is determined that the power supply is secured and the power supply is not cut off (the power cutoff signal is supplied even in this case), and this is for confirmation by the manufacturer. Data may be backed up in each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 (not backed up as store confirmation data). Further, the process of step 95AKS111 is executed. After that, initialization processing (step S21) or the like is performed according to the fact that the effect control command at power-on is not supplied from the main board 11 (for example, when a command other than the effect control command at power-on is received, the relevant command is received. If the effect control command cannot be received for a predetermined period after waiting for the command, the effect execution is restarted based on the effect control command received thereafter).

By the above processing, whether the effect control microcomputer 120 is in the mode of turning on the power of the effect control microcomputer 120 (normal power on of the entire pachinko game machine 1 (including power on with reset)). , The main board 11 can be processed according to whether the power is turned on by resetting only the effect control microcomputer 120 that is not disconnected), and in the case of the normal power on of the entire pachinko game machine 1. , Both the store confirmation data and the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up, and in the case of resetting only the effect control microcomputer 120, only the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up. Further, in the case of normal power-on of the entire pachinko gaming machine 1, the store confirmation data is backed up before the manufacturer confirmation data as in steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107, so that the backup priority of the store confirmation data is prioritized. (Priority) is higher than the backup of the manufacturer confirmation data.

(Effect of feature 95AK)
Conventionally, since the backup data was backed up without distinguishing between the manufacturer confirmation data and the store confirmation data, the store confirmation data was stored by the same processing as the manufacturer confirmation data (for example,). Some data as store confirmation data is stored in each of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 in the same manner as the manufacturer confirmation data). However, the processing time when backing up the manufacturer confirmation data may be long as described above, and when the store confirmation data is backed up with such processing time, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on by the store staff or the like. The possibility that the timing of being cut off (timing of power interruption) overlaps with the backup period is higher than when the processing time for backing up the store confirmation data is shortened. Further, if the processing time for backing up is long, it tends to overlap with the occurrence timing of an event such as resetting only the effect control microcomputer 120. If the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off during the backup or if only the effect control microcomputer 120 is reset, the store confirmation data will not be backed up properly. For example, the store confirmation data indicates. In some cases, the log information could not be displayed on the maintenance history screen or the like. In such a case, the staff or the like may have a feeling of distrust because the log information that should be displayed in the maintenance history scene is not displayed. For example, when a staff member repeatedly turns the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on and off repeatedly (for example, when the behavior of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is strange, such an operation can be performed), conventionally, the power is turned on. The power may be turned off while backing up the time data, and the log information indicating that the power was turned on (power on) could not be backed up properly, and the log information indicating that the power was turned on ("power on" or "power on") The date and time, etc.) may not be displayed on the maintenance history screen. In such a case, the staff and the like have a feeling of distrust as to whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operating normally. In the feature unit 95AK, the time required for backing up the store confirmation data (transfer and write time) is shorter than that of the manufacturer confirmation data, so that the above-mentioned inconvenience is less likely to occur. Furthermore, the backup of the store confirmation data has a higher priority than the backup of the manufacturer confirmation data and is performed with priority, so the time from the establishment of the backup conditions to the completion of the backup is shortened (both). Even if the data backup conflicts, the backup completion of the store confirmation data is not delayed), which also makes the above-mentioned inconvenience less likely to occur. On the other hand, since the manufacturer confirmation data is confirmed by the manufacturer (the staff cannot confirm it, and the confirmation is more difficult than the store confirmation data), the power is turned off during backup to some extent. Even if the data is lost, the above problem does not occur. In this way, the time required to back up the store confirmation data is shorter than the backup of the manufacturer confirmation data, and the priority of backing up the store confirmation data is higher than the priority of the manufacturer confirmation data. By increasing the height (backup process of FIG. 23-2, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107 of FIG. 23-6), the store confirmation data and the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up according to the purpose of use, and the backup can be preferably performed. Furthermore, the backup processing of the store confirmation data and the manufacturer confirmation data is different (the execution time, the number of writes, and the number of backup storage units are different), and the store confirmation data is better than the manufacturer confirmation data. However, since it is easy to check the log information indicated by each data (here, the former can be confirmed on the pachinko game machine 1 while the latter cannot be confirmed), it is possible to make the use of each data appropriate. (The data that does not need to be confirmed at the store can be used as the manufacturer confirmation data, and the data that the staff confirms at the store can be used as the store confirmation data), and suitable backup is realized.

In particular, when the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 and the second backup storage unit 95AK004 are configured by one FRAM (registered trademark), data is stored in each of the storage units 95AK001 to 95AK003. It takes time to do this (because the data is serially stored in the order of 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 → 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 → 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003). On the other hand, in the above, since the store confirmation data is stored in the backup storage unit (here, one, but two may be used), which is less than the manufacturer confirmation data, it is necessary to back up the store confirmation data. The time is shortened. As a result, backup can be preferably performed.

In addition, the amount of data for store confirmation may be smaller than the amount of data for manufacturer confirmation (the amount of writing to the backup storage unit at one time may be smaller), which is more for store confirmation. The time required for data backup can be shortened, and backup can be performed favorably.

Further, by the process of FIG. 23-6, the effect control microcomputer 120 is set to the mode of turning on the power of the effect control microcomputer 120 (whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normally powered on or the effect control microcomputer 1 is turned on). Processing can be performed according to the reset of only 120 (whether the main board 11 or the like is not cut off), and when the power of the entire pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the store confirmation data and the manufacturer confirmation data In the case of resetting only the effect control microcomputer 120 by backing up both of the above, only the manufacturer confirmation data can be backed up. As a result, in the case of resetting only the effect control microcomputer 120, it is possible to prevent the reset from being displayed on the maintenance history screen by backing up the log information of the reset as store confirmation data. Normally, the reset of only the effect control microcomputer 120 is not directly related to the progress of the game and is often minor. Therefore, if the staff is notified, the reset will be displayed on the maintenance history screen. By preventing it from being reset, it is possible to preferably perform backup.

(Modification example)
Various modifications are possible for the above configuration. Although the modified examples are illustrated below, at least a part of the following plurality of modified examples may be combined.

(Modification example 1)
The CPU 131 of the effect control microcomputer 120 may, for example, perform the power failure date / time recording process shown in FIG. 23-7. The process may be executed in place of or in addition to the date / time information storage process in step S78 (for example, after the date / time information storage process).

In this process, the CPU 131 is first set with a temporary storage enable flag (provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133. The same applies to the flag and the timer) indicating that the temporary storage of the date and time information from the timer circuit 135 (RTC) is permitted. It is confirmed whether or not it is (on) (step 012IWS841). If the temporary storage enable flag is set, the CPU 131 confirms whether or not the temporary storage timer for measuring the time for temporarily storing the date and time information from the timer circuit 135 (RTC) has timed out (step 012IWS842). ). If the temporary storage timer has timed out, the CPU 131 reads the date and time information from the timer circuit 135 (RTC) and stores the read date and time information in the temporary area provided in the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 (step 012IWS843). Further, the CPU 131 sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012 IWS844).

The date and time information is stored in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 every 100 ms, but when the previous date and time information is stored in the temporary area, new date and time information is stored at any time every 100 ms. Is overwritten and stored in the temporary area.

If the temporary storage flag is not set (N in step 012IWS841), whether the CPU 131 has received the initialization specification command (RAM clear notification command in the above) or the recovery command (power failure recovery specification command in the above). (Step 012IWS845). If the initialization specification command or the recovery command is received, does the CPU 131 store the log information of the previous power-on date and time in the log area provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. Confirm whether or not (step 012IWS846). If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is not stored (N in step 012IWS846), the process proceeds to step 012IWS849. If the log information of the previous power-on date and time is stored (Y in step 012IWS846), the CPU 131 reads the date and time information stored in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133, and reads the read date and time information as the power failure date and time. Log information (manufacturer confirmation data and / or store confirmation data) in the log area (manufacturer confirmation data and / or store confirmation data storage area) provided in the backup data memories 210A to 210D of the backup memory board 14. Is memorized (step 012IWS847). Then, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

If neither the initialization specification command nor the recovery command has been received (N in step 012IWS845), the CPU 131 is transmitted when the power is turned on for other commands (however, the setting confirmation start command and the setting change start command, etc.). It is confirmed whether or not the command (excluding the command) has been received (step 012IWS848). If other commands are received, for example, if a fluctuation pattern designation command, a display result designation command, or the like is received, the process proceeds to step 012IWS849.

In step 012IWS849, the CPU 131 sets the temporary storage flag (step 012IWS849). Further, the CPU 131 sets a value corresponding to 100 ms in the temporary storage timer (step 012 IWS844).

When the temporary storage flag is set in step 012IWS849, it is maintained until the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs. Then, when the effect control main process is started due to the power-on of the game machine or the occurrence of a system reset, it is assumed that the effect is reset by the initialization process.

FIG. 23-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the recording timing of the log information of the power failure date and time. As shown in FIG. 23-8, when the CPU 131 is running, the CPU 131 is determined to be Y in step 012IWS841 of the power failure date / time recording process, and the process of steps 012IWS842-S844 is executed for 100 ms. The date and time information is temporarily stored in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 each time.

Next, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped or the system of the CPU 131 is reset, the initialization process is executed and the temporary storage flag is reset, even if the CPU 131 returns to the running state, the power failure date and time It is determined to be N in step 012IWS841 of the recording process, temporary storage of date and time information every 100 ms is not executed, and the last stored date and time information is maintained in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133.

If the power supply to the game machine is stopped and then the power supply to the game machine is started, at least the initialization designation command or the recovery command should be received. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (1), the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is read and the read date and time on condition that the initialization designation command or the recovery command is received. The log information is stored in the log area with the information as the power failure date and time (see Y in step 012IWS845 and step 012IWS847). After that, the temporary storage enable flag is set, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850). However, in this example, the log information of the power-on date and time is also recorded (see step 012IWS203), but when the log information of the power-on date and time before the occurrence of the power failure is not recorded. Since there is a possibility that some kind of abnormality has occurred, in this case, the log information of the power failure date and time is not recorded (see N in step 012IWS846).

On the other hand, if the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs, the power supply of the game machine itself is not stopped, and the command at power-on such as the initialization designation command and the recovery command from the game control microcomputer 100 is not stopped. Is not sent. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), if the initialization designation command or the recovery command is not received, it is determined that the power failure of the game machine itself has not occurred. Then, the date and time information maintained in the temporary area is controlled so as not to record the log information as the power failure date and time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), based on the reception of other commands (excluding the commands sent when the power is turned on, such as the setting confirmation start command and the setting change start command). For example, the temporary storage enable flag is set based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern specification command, the display result specification command, and the like, and the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms is restarted (see steps 012IWS849 and S850).

If the log information of the power failure date and time is recorded only based on the detection of the stop on the CPU131 side, if the system reset of the CPU131 occurs (the system reset of the CPU131 temporarily causes the CPU131 to be recorded). (When the power supply is in the same state as when the power supply is stopped), the log information of the power failure date and time is also recorded, and the log information of the power failure date and time is recorded even though the power failure of the game machine itself did not occur. It may be recorded. Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8, the date and time when the CPU 131 is stopped is temporarily stored as a temporary power failure date and time, and commands at power-on such as an initialization specification command and a recovery command are used. Is configured to formally record the log information of the power failure date and time on the condition that the command is received, so that such a situation does not occur.

In this example, on the condition that the initialization specification command or the recovery command is received, it is determined that the game machine itself has been disconnected and the date and time of the interruption is recorded in the log information. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to record the power failure date and time in the log information based on the reception of another command transmitted when the power is turned on, such as a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command.

Further, in this example, the case where the log information is not recorded when the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs instead of the power failure of the game machine itself is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, in addition to the area for recording log information for amusement stores (store confirmation data storage unit), an area for recording log information for game machine manufacturers (manufacturer confirmation data storage unit) is provided. However, the date and time when the system reset of the CPU 131 occurs may be recorded as log information in the area for the game machine maker. With such a configuration, the log information may be recorded as the development information of the game machine maker. Can be used.

An example of a gaming machine having the above configuration as an example is shown below.
Predetermined control means (for example, a main board 11 for controlling the progress of a game or a game control microcomputer 100), and
It is provided with a specific control means (for example, CPU131) that performs control based on information from a predetermined control means.
The specific control means can temporarily store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is stopped (for example, the CPU 131 executes step 012IWS842-S844 in the temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133 every 100 ms. Memorize date and time information),
Information that can identify that the power supply output by the predetermined control means has started when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, an initialization designation command (RAM clear notification command) or at the time of recovery). A power failure date / time storage means (for example, a part for executing step 012IWS847 in the CPU 131) that can store the temporarily stored date / time as the power failure date / time based on the input of the command (power failure recovery designation command) is included.
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

When the power supply to the specific control means is started, the power supply date / time storage means does not store the temporarily stored date / time as the power failure date / time if the information that can identify that the power supply has started cannot be input. For example, if the CPU 131 does not move to step 012IWS847 when it is N in step 012IWS845 and does not receive the initialization specification command or the recovery command, the CPU 131 does not store the log information in the log area as the power failure date and time). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

The date and time may be temporarily stored at predetermined timings (for example, 100 ms) (for example, the date and time information may be stored in a temporary area of the external RAM 122 or the internal RAM 133). According to such a configuration, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

Based on the power supply to the specific control means being stopped, the temporary storage of the date and time at each predetermined timing is stopped (for example, the CPU 131 resets the temporary storage enable flag in the initialization process, so that the date and time information is every 100 ms. (Temporary storage will not be executed), and based on the input of predetermined information (for example, initialization specification command, recovery command, other commands) output by the predetermined control means, at each predetermined timing. Even if the temporary storage of the date and time is restarted (for example, the CPU 131 is configured to restart the temporary storage of the date and time information every 100 ms by executing step 012IWS849 to set the temporary storage enable flag). Good. According to such a configuration, the power failure date and time can be suitably stored.

The specific control means can store the date and time when the power supply to the specific control means is started (for example, the CPU 131 records the power-on date and time as log information), and the power interruption date and time storage means starts the power supply. If the date and time are not stored, the temporarily stored date and time is not stored as the power failure date and time (for example, the CPU 131 does not shift to step 012IWS847 when it is N in step 012IWS846, so that the power is turned on before the power failure occurs. If the log information of the date and time is not recorded, the log information of the power failure date and time may not be recorded). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal storage state.

Information generated during a game that is a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1" to set value "3") having different advantages for the player. A storage area (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing the data, and a history display means (for example, a CPU 131 for displaying the screens of FIGS. 14 to 16) capable of identifiablely displaying abnormal history information (for example, log information) related to the game. And an initialization processing execution means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing an initialization process (for example, RAM clear) for initializing the stored contents of the storage area. , Setting change processing execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically)) capable of executing setting change processing (for example, setting change processing) for changing the setting value when the initialization processing is executed. The history display means can identify and display that the initialization process has been executed when the initialization process is executed and the setting change process is not executed (for example, CPU103)). , Display the RAM clear log information as shown in FIG. 15), when the initialization process and the setting change process are executed, the settings are made without displaying that the initialization process has been executed. It is possible to identify that the change process has been executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14, only the log information indicating that the setting change has been completed (“setting change has been completed”) is displayed). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, since unnecessary information is not displayed, it is possible to prevent the history information from becoming difficult to confirm.

(Modification 2)
The effect control microcomputer 120 determines the validity of the stored contents (backup data) of the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 at appropriate timings such as when the power is turned on, parity and check sum. Alternatively, in the case of verification by arbitrary error detection processing using a hash value or the like, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 (backup storage area 95AK001A) → 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002 (backup storage area 95AK002A). → 1-3 Backup storage 95AK003 (backup storage area 95AK003A) → 1-1 Backup storage 95AK001 (backup storage area 95AK001B) → 1-2 Backup storage 95AK002 (backup storage area 95AK002B) → 1-3 When the backup storage unit 95AK003 (backup storage area 95AK003B) ... and the backup data are sequentially stored, if the verification result of the latest backup data is NG, the new backup data is added to the NG backup data. May be overwritten, and then other backup storage units may be stored. For example, when backup data is stored in the backup storage areas 95AK001A to 95AK003A and no backup data is stored after the backup storage area 95AK001B, the backup data stored in the backup storage area 95AK003A is NG and the others are OK. In the case of, new backup data may be stored from the backup storage area 95AK003A. In this case, it is advisable to store the same data (data that seems to be OK) as the backup data that was NG again in the backup storage area 95AK003A as new backup data, but store other backup data in the backup storage area 95AK003A. , Backup storage area 95AK003A to backup storage area 95AK002B may store the same three backup data (hereinafter, the three same backup data are stored in the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 → 1-1 backup storage unit. It is stored in the order of 95AK001 → 1-2 backup storage unit 95AK002). Here, if new backup data is stored (overwritten) from the backup storage area 95AK001A, there is a risk that the backup data that was OK will be overwritten with the NG backup data. It is possible to prevent such a risk.

(Modification example 3)
The process of backing up the manufacturer confirmation data executed by the effect control microcomputer 120 (transfer to the backup memory board 14, etc., etc., and the effect control microcomputer 120 directly uses the manufacturer confirmation data as backup data. It may be written to a storage unit that can be backed up. In that case, the writing process. The same applies to the manufacturer confirmation data), the first backup process, and the second backup process, which is the process of backing up the store confirmation data. It is good that the processing itself other than the data to be backed up is different, and the processing itself includes the execution time, the area for storing the backup data, the processing priority (processing execution priority), and one backup. It is preferable that at least one of the amount of data written is different.

(Modification example 4)
The effect control microcomputer 120 may transfer the store confirmation data and / or the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14 without going through the first backup data buffer or the first backup data buffer. Further, the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 4th backup storage unit 95AK004 are provided on the effect control board 12, and the effect control microcomputer 120 stores the store confirmation data and / or the manufacturer confirmation data in the first backup data buffer. Alternatively, the data may be written to the first backup storage unit 95AK001 to the fourth backup storage unit 95AK004 with or without the first backup data buffer.

(Structure of feature section 95AK)
Hereinafter, a game machine using the feature unit 95AK as an example will be described.

A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Control means (for example, microcomputer 120 for effect control) and
A storage means capable of storing backup data (for example, a backup memory board 14 (particularly, a 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to a second backup storage unit 95AK004)) is provided.
The control means
Based on the establishment of the first backup condition, the first backup process (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data on the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means (Transfer processing, etc.) can be executed,
A second backup process (for example, a backup memory) having an execution time shorter than that of the first backup process for storing the second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition. The priority of transferring the store confirmation data to the board 14, etc.) is different from that of the first backup process (the priority of the process execution, which is the priority when the first backup process and the second backup process conflict with each other. Can be executed (including the order of executing first) (for example, the backup of the store confirmation data is performed in a shorter execution time than the backup of the manufacturer confirmation data, and the processing priority is high. High etc.),
Game machine.

In the above, the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 that executes the effect based on the command from the main board 11 that controls the progress of the game operates as the control means. The present invention is applied to a gaming machine having a second effect control board that executes an effect in cooperation with the effect control board 12 by a command from the effect control board 12 in addition to the effect control board 12, and the second effect control is applied. The above control means may be applied to a computer, a CPU, or the like mounted on a board.

The control means and the storage means may be provided on the same substrate. In such a case, the first backup process or the second backup process may be a process of directly writing the backup data to the storage means. Of the storage means, the part that stores the first backup data and the part that stores the second backup data may be a part of the same storage device such as FRAM (registered trademark), or two different parts. It may be formed from each storage device. The set of the effect control microcomputer 120 and the backup memory board 14 is regarded as a control means, and the first backup process and the second backup process are performed by the 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to the 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003 or the second. It may be regarded as a process of transferring and writing backup data to the backup storage unit 95AK004 (even in such a case, in the feature unit 95AK, the execution time of the second backup process is shorter).

The first backup condition and the second backup condition may be the same condition or different conditions. The backup condition may be, for example, a condition that triggers the creation of backup data (occurrence of an event to be recorded based on log information, etc.). Backup data may be created (recorded in RAM or the like) when the backup conditions are satisfied, and the created backup data may be stored in the storage means at a timing when a power failure may occur ("" Expressions such as "store the first backup data in the storage means based on the establishment of the first backup condition" include such an aspect). The first backup data and the second backup data may be the same data (however, different data are preferable). The first backup data may be, for example, at least one backup data that serves as the manufacturer confirmation data. The second backup data may be at least one backup data that serves as the store confirmation data.

The execution time of the first backup process and the execution time of the second backup process may be only the period during which the backup data is actually transferred or the period during which the backup data is written, or the backup data is transferred in a plurality of times such as for each timer interrupt. Alternatively, when writing, the period may include the time between each time. Further, the execution time may be the period from the establishment of the backup condition to the end of the backup (it may be considered that the backup process is performed in the entire period from the establishment of the backup condition to the end of the backup).

As a means for making the execution time of the second backup process shorter than the execution time of the first backup process, (1) the amount of data of the second backup data is made smaller than the amount of data of the first backup data, (2). Make the number of storage destinations of the second backup data smaller than the number of storage destinations of the first backup data. (3) The number of writes to the storage means is larger for the first backup data than for the second backup data. It can be realized by doing.

Which of the first backup process and the second backup process has a higher priority is arbitrary (for example, steps 95AKS001 to 95AKS002 may be executed after step 95AKS003 to 95AKS010).

According to the above configuration, by making the execution time of the second backup process shorter than the execution time of the first backup process, a control means such as a power failure (power off of the game machine, a voltage drop, etc.) during the second backup process. The possibility that only the power is turned off, only the control means or the entire game machine is reset, etc. (the possibility that the second backup process and the power failure etc. overlap in time) is lower than that of the first backup process. (For example, the possibility that the transfer of backup data to the backup memory board 14 and the power off of only the control means overlap, and the possibility that the writing of backup data and the power off of the gaming machine overlap are low). That is, the possibility of failure of the second backup process due to a power failure or the like occurring in the middle is lower than that of the first backup process. Further, since the first backup process and the second backup process are executed in different priorities, both processes are not executed at the same time. Therefore, when the first backup process and the second backup process are executed at the same time, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the execution time of the second backup process being extended due to the execution of the first backup process, and the second backup process is in progress. The possibility of power failure etc. is low. As described above, at least the second backup data can be backed up with a lower possibility of failure (than the first backup data), and a suitable backup is realized.

The priority of processing execution of the second backup processing may be higher than that of the first backup processing. As a result, the second backup process can be executed earlier than the first backup process after the second backup condition is satisfied, and the possibility of power failure or the like occurring from the satisfaction of the second backup condition to the completion of the second backup process can be reduced, which is preferable. Backup is realized.

In place of or in addition to the configuration of the control means, the control means
Based on the establishment of the first backup condition, the first backup process (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data on the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means (Transfer processing, etc.) can be executed,
The backup storage is different from the first backup process in which the second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) is stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition (for example, the time required for backup is different). The second backup process (for example, the process of transferring the store confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) can be executed (for example, the number of copies is different, the priority of processing is different, the amount of backup data written is different, etc.). ,
The information indicated by the second backup data stored in the storage means is easier to confirm than the information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means (for example, the log indicated by the store confirmation data). The information can be confirmed by the image display device 5, but the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data can only be read by the manufacturer's reading device),
You may do so.

The ease of "confirmation" is, for example, a large amount of time and effort for confirming the information indicated by each backup data (the less time and effort, the easier the confirmation). For example, as described above, the store confirmation The log information indicated by the data can be confirmed by the image display device 5, but the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data can be read only by the manufacturer's reading device, and the log information can be confirmed only through the reading device. In this case, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is easier to confirm because it does not require the trouble of reading. For example, the second backup data is stored so that the information indicated by the second backup data can be displayed (confirmed on the game machine) by a display means or the like based on the operation of the staff or the like on the game machine. 1 The backup data can be confirmed only by reading the information indicated by the first backup data from the game machine (that is, only by a device other than the game machine) (it cannot be confirmed even by operating the game machine). ) (The above is also an example of this), the game machine may be configured, and in this case as well, the information indicated by the second backup data is easier to confirm because it does not require the trouble of reading. In addition, the manufacturer confirmation data may be darkened and stored, and the store confirmation data may be stored without being darkened. In this case, the store confirmation data is used because there is no need for darkening. Is easy to check.

The first backup process and the second backup process are different from each other in the processes other than the first backup data and the second backup data stored in the storage means.
You may do so.

The first backup process and the second backup process include the execution time, the area for storing the first backup data and the second backup data, and the priority of the process (priority of execution of the process) as the process itself. At least one of the amount of writing of backup data at one time is different,
You may do so.

According to each of the above configurations, the first backup process and the second backup process are different, and the handling of the first backup data and the second backup data after backup (easiness of confirming the information indicated by each data) is different. Therefore, the backup process can be preferably executed.

The information indicated by the first backup data stored by the storage means is not notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1).
The information indicated by the second backup data stored in the storage means can be notified on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the store confirmation data is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1).
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed. The above notification may be notification by voice or the like. Further, when the execution time of the second backup process is shorter than that of the first backup process, the backup process with a low possibility of failure can be performed for the second backup data indicating the information that can be notified by the above configuration. (2) It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the information indicated by the backup data should be notified but not notified due to the failure of the backup process, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

Information indicated by the second backup data (for example, log information indicated by store confirmation data) can be displayed on the display means (for example, image display device 5) based on the second backup data stored by the storage means. A display control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 120) is provided.
The information indicated by the first backup data stored by the storage means (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data) is not displayed on the gaming machine (for example, the log information indicated by the manufacturer confirmation data is not displayed. Not displayed on pachinko game machine 1 etc.),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed. Further, when the execution time of the second backup process is shorter than that of the first backup process, the second backup data indicating the information that can be displayed can be backed up with a low possibility of failure by the above configuration. (2) It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the information indicated by the backup data should be displayed but not notified due to the failure of the backup process, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

The storage means
A first storage area (for example, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003) to which the first backup data is written and the second backup data is not written.
A second storage area (for example, a second backup storage unit 95AK004) in which the second backup data is written and the first backup data is not written is provided.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the storage area of the first backup data and the storage area of the second backup data can be separated, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

The first storage area is a storage area of a first number (for example, three) in which the same first backup data is written (for example, 1-1 backup storage unit 95AK001 to 1-3 backup storage unit 95AK003, etc.). Have,
The second storage area has a second number (eg, one) of storage areas (eg, second backup storage unit 95AK004, etc.) that is less than the first number in which the same second backup data is written.
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the execution time of the second backup process can be surely shorter than that of the first backup process, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

With the first control means (for example, main board 11)
A second control means (for example, a microcomputer 120 for effect control), which is the control means, is provided.
When only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means is reset, the second control means executes the first backup process and executes the second backup process. No (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data is backed up in step 95AKS112, but the store confirmation data is not backed up).
You may do so.

Although the above reset determination is performed by the power interruption signal in the above, it may be performed by another method. For example, the reset determination may be made by a command or the like first transmitted from the first control means to the second control means after the reset (the command is a command other than the command normally transmitted after the reset (variation). If it is a pattern designation command, etc.), it is determined that only the second control means has been reset).

According to the above configuration, when only the second control means of the first control means and the second control means is reset, the second backup process having a short execution time is not executed or the second is easy to confirm. Since the second backup process for the backup data is not executed, the backup process can be preferably executed (for example, it is a minor defect that only the second control means is reset by the second backup data. In many cases, it is not necessary to unnecessarily notify the minor defect, and it is not necessary to unnecessarily notify that only the second control means has been reset).

The second control means executes the first backup process and the second backup process when both the first control means and the second control means are reset (for example, steps 95AKS106 and 95AKS107). ),
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed. When both the first control means and the second control means are reset, it is a reset that is usually assumed, and a backup to that effect can be firmly performed, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

When the voltage supplied to the second control means is equal to or less than a predetermined value, a signal supply means (for example, electric power) capable of supplying a predetermined signal (for example, a power failure signal) that does not cause the second control means to operate. Equipped with a disconnection detection circuit 95AK010, etc.)
In the second control means, after the power is turned on, whether both the first control means and the second control means are reset based on whether or not the predetermined signal is supplied or not. It is possible to identify whether only has been reset (for example, processing after 95AKS104).
You may do so.

According to the above configuration, the reset control means can be identified by the predetermined signal, and the backup process can be preferably executed.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player by performing variable display. A control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 120 or the like) and a storage means capable of storing backup data (for example, a backup memory board 14 or the like) are provided, and the control means is based on the establishment of the first backup condition. Then, the first backup process (for example, the process of transferring the manufacturer confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) for storing the first backup data (for example, the manufacturer confirmation data) in the storage means can be executed. The second backup process (for example,) having an execution time shorter than that of the first backup process for storing the second backup data (for example, store confirmation data) in the storage means based on the establishment of the second backup condition. , The process of transferring the store confirmation data to the backup memory board 14) can be executed in a priority order different from that of the first backup process (for example, the backup of the store confirmation data is performed by the manufacturer confirmation data. Although the execution time is shorter than that of the backup and the processing priority is high, the information indicated by the first backup data stored in the storage means is not notified on the game machine (for example, manufacturer confirmation). The log information indicated by the data for the game is not displayed on the pachinko game machine 1), and the information indicated by the second backup data stored by the storage means can be notified on the game machine (for example, the store confirmation data can be displayed). The log information to be shown is displayed on the pachinko game machine 1 etc.), a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A, etc.), and a specific display corresponding to the variable display. Specific display means that can be displayed (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.) and promotion effect execution means that can execute promotion effects that promote the movement of the player (for example, variable). The effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the display effect process and the operation effect execution means (for example, step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process) that can execute the operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means are executed. (CPU 120 for effect control, etc.) and a predetermined effect are executed during execution of variable display. The specific display means includes a possible predetermined effect execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control that executes step 87AKS049 of the effect processing during variable display), and the specific display means has a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes including (for example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4), and the promotion effect executing means uses a special mode (for example, the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including the large V-con display, and the predetermined effect execution means is , "Intense heat!" Using a predetermined mode (for example, display image 87AKE3). !! The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3) including the message of the specific display, and the ratio differs depending on the display mode of the specific display. The predetermined effect is executed according to the predetermined aspect (see, for example, 87AK41 of the determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-12), and the promotion effect is performed by the special aspect at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect. It is executed (see, for example, 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-13), and is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (for example, FIG. 32-1). (Refer to 87AK51, a determination example of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in No. 13).

According to such a configuration, the backup process can be preferably executed. In addition, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by directing and improve the game entertainment.

That is, by making the contents and priorities of the backup data to be stored different depending on the backup conditions, for example, the backup of the store confirmation data is performed in a shorter execution time than the backup of the manufacturer confirmation data, and the processing is performed. Backup processing can be appropriately executed, such as by setting the priority to be high so that the game machine can be restored as much as possible when a power failure occurs while it is installed in the store, and a specific display is displayed. By associating the mode with the effect mode of the predetermined effect and the effect mode of the promotion effect, the player's expectation up to the operation such as the button operation of the player is displayed in a specific manner in addition to the effect mode of the promotion effect. It is possible to appropriately enhance the game entertainment by the display mode and the production mode of the predetermined effect. In addition, if a power failure occurs when the player's expectation is high, it is possible to prevent the game from being initialized without being restored and the game interest from being lowered as much as possible.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine in which the backup processing can be suitably executed and the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing to improve the gaming interest, the player can perform variable display. A detection means (for example, stick controller 31A, controller sensor unit 35A) that can control a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player and that can detect the movement of the player. Etc.), specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, active display area 87AKA1, first hold display area 87AKAB1, second hold display area 87AKB2, etc.), and promotion to promote the movement of the player. A facilitating effect executing means that can execute an effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display) and an operation effect executing means that can execute an operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means (for example, an operation effect executing means that can execute the operation effect. For example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process and a predetermined effect execution means that can execute a predetermined effect during the execution of the variable display (for example, an effect that executes step 87AKS049 of the variable display effect process). The specific display means includes a control CPU 120 and the like), and the specific display means has a plurality of display modes (for example, display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4) including a specific mode (for example, a red display using the display image 87AKC4). The specific display can be displayed by any one of them, and the promotion effect executing means can be applied to a plurality of effect modes (for example, display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3) including a special mode (for example, a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3). The promotion effect can be executed by any one of (the size of the V-con display according to the display, etc.), and the predetermined effect execution means has a predetermined mode (for example, a message of "extreme heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3). The predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes including the above (for example, a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3), and the predetermined effect can be executed at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display. The predetermined effect is executed (see, for example, 87AK41, a determination example of the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-12), and the promotion effect is executed at a different ratio according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, FIG. Promotional production according to the cut-in production in 32-13 (See decision example 87AK51), which is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of the promotion effect (see, for example, determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIG. 32-13). A game machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of another form example (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 24 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 24, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol" or "special symbol 1", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "second". Also called "special figure" or "special figure 2". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 25). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 24, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 25), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 24, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 24), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 25).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 25).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 9013, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 9013 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 9013 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 9013, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal or not (step). S905). In step S905, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is enabled (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 27. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 27 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 27 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 27 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 29 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S9072). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S9073). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9073; No), the process of step S9073 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S9073 (step S9073; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9074), and the command analysis process is executed (step S9075). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S9075, the effect control process process is executed (step S9076). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S9076, the effect random number update process is executed (step S9077), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S9073. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S9073.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9076 of FIG. 29 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S90161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S90161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S90171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect controls are executed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park are provided in the setting changeover main body and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the value is for the amusement park side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

31-1 (A) and 31-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 31-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one in which the first special figure and the second special figure use individual display result judgment tables, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Depending on each set value, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is "small hit" regardless of the variable special map. The probability that it is determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

FIGS. 31-2 to 31-5 show a numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 31-2 shows a numerical range of hit determination values corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 31-3 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state. FIG. 31-4 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. FIG. 31-5 shows the numerical range of the hit determination value corresponding to the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 31-2, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numerical values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is ". It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 31-3, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 31-4, in the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numerical values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is ". It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 31-5, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 determines the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 31-1 indicates the probability of becoming a big hit (ratio) and the probability of becoming a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values of 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 31-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 26, is set to interrupt prohibition, and then the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, Depending on the state of the lock switch, a process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round indicator are lit from the start of each process, and the first hold indicator 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in a state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Perform processing according to each (step S10A), and end the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag is cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It may be possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B may be executed.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without this, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the setting value is being changed and the power is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the amusement park to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a hit determination value of 1020 to 1237 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 31-1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1020. It suffices to judge whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is disturbed as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 31-1, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability variation state, the jackpot determination value of 1020 is used as the jackpot reference value to determine the jackpot. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, the value of the random number value MR1 is set. Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It may be judged whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 31-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself, 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 31-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot when it is 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature parts 87AK to 89AK)
FIG. 32-1 shows a configuration example 87AKP0 of the screen display in the image display device 5 with respect to the feature units 87AK to 89AK. In the configuration example 87AKP0, an active display area 87AKA1, a first hold display area 87AKB1, and a second hold display area 87AKB2 are provided on the screen of the image display device 5. In the active display area 87AKA1, active display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. In the first hold display area 87AKB1, the hold display is performed by displaying the effect image corresponding to the variable display in which the execution is held according to the number of the first hold storages. In the second hold display area 87AKB2, hold display is performed by displaying an effect image corresponding to the variable display in which execution is held, according to the number of second hold storages. As described above, in the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKAB2, active display and hold display which are specific displays based on the information related to the variable display are possible. The hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1 is also referred to as "first hold display", and the hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2 is also referred to as "second hold display".

The display area of the first hold display area 87AKB1 may be configured so that, for example, the first hold display is right-justified. In the first hold display area 87AKB1, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the first hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the right end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start winning opening, the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is increased. At this time, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the increased first hold is made at the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first hold display area 87AKB1. As a hold display corresponding to the number of stored items, a display of an effect image showing a new first hold display is added. If there is another 1st hold display in the 1st hold display area 87AKB1, the display is hidden to the left of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed in the 1st hold display area 87AKB1. In the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"), the effect image showing a new first hold display as the hold display corresponding to the increased first hold storage number. Add a display. When there is one or more first hold displays in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and a new first special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the first hold display area 87AKB1. At the rightmost display part, the first hold display is erased (digested). At this time, if there is a first hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4", those first hold displays are moved to the right side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the first hold display corresponding to the first special figure game whose execution is still held without being started is possible according to the first hold storage number. Further, in the first hold display area 87AKB1, by displaying the effect image to be the hold display image, the first hold display included in the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

The second hold display area 87AKB2 may be configured as a display area so that, for example, the second hold display is left-justified. In the second hold display area 87AKB2, four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the second hold storage number "4" are provided, and the hold numbers "1", "2", and "3" are provided in order from the left end. , "4" may be associated with it. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start winning opening, the number of second reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game increases. At this time, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the increased second hold is displayed at the leftmost display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second hold display area 87AKB2. As a hold display corresponding to the number of stored items, a display of an effect image showing a new second hold display is added. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the display is hidden to the right of the display part where the other second hold display is performed in the second hold display area 87AKB2. A production image showing a new second hold display as a hold display corresponding to the increased second hold storage number at the part (display part corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). Add a display. When there is one or more second hold displays in the second hold display area 87AKB2 and a new second special figure game is started, the hold number corresponds to "1" in the second hold display area 87AKB2. At the leftmost display part, the second hold display is erased (digested). At this time, if there is a second hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4", those second hold displays are moved to the left side in the direction of the erased display part ( Shift). As described above, in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the second hold display corresponding to the second special figure game whose execution is still held without being started is possible according to the second hold storage number. Further, in the second hold display area 87AKB2, by displaying the effect image that becomes the hold display image, the second hold display included in the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started is displayed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. It can be carried out.

In the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the first special figure game, the active display corresponding to the first hold display erased (digested) in the first hold display area 87AKAB1 is started. Further, in the active display area 87AKA1, in response to the start of the second special figure game, the active display corresponding to the second hold display erased (digested) in the second hold display area 87AKAB2 is started. In the active display area 87AKA1, by displaying the effect image that becomes the active display image, the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be performed as the corresponding display related to the variable display. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be. The display mode of the active display may change to a display mode different from that of the first hold display or the second hold display by executing the active display change effect.

On the screen of the image display device 5 in the configuration example 87AKP0, the active display area 87AKA1 is arranged between the first hold display area 87AKB1 and the second hold display area 87AKB2. On the other hand, the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKAB2 may be arranged at arbitrary positions on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the arrangement of the active display area 87AKA1 may not be changed, and the first reserved display area 87AKAB1 and the second reserved display area 87AKA2 may be interchanged and arranged.

In the feature units 87AK to 89AK, as an example of the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect of "active display change" is executed. The notice effect of "active display change" changes the display mode of the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the variable display whose execution has started, and the execution starts at a rate according to the display mode after the change. It is announced that the display result of the variable display will be "big hit" and will be controlled to the big hit game state. In the "active display change" notice effect, the display color of the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution is a specific color (for example, blue, green, or red) different from the predetermined color (for example, white) in the normal state. ). It suffices to suggest that the jackpot game state is controlled at a predetermined ratio by changing the display mode that the player can recognize, such as the display color of the active display. In the case of active display using an effect image showing a display pattern, a message, a character, or the like, any display mode may be changed to a display mode different from the normal display mode. The notice effect of "active display change" is also referred to as change notice or change effect.

The suggestion effect is executed before the advance notice effect of "active display change" which is the change effect is executed. The suggestion effect suggests that the display mode of the active display changes. After the suggestion effect is executed, the change effect may or may not be executed. As described above, after the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may change or the display mode of the active display may not change. The suggestion effect includes a Gase suggestion effect. Since the change effect is not executed after the Gase suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change. The suggestion effect may be executed in a common effect mode regardless of whether the change effect is executed or not executed and the suggestion effect is not executed. As a result, the player may not be able to determine whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the suggestion effect is completed. The suggestion effect and the change effect are separate effects in that the suggestion effect is executed before the change effect, but the change effect is not executed after the suggestion effect is executed. There is. The suggestion effect may be executed in an effect mode that temporarily changes the display mode of the active display, for example, displaying an effect image of the character in the active display area 87AKA1. However, the display mode of the active display changed by the suggestion effect is different from the display mode of the active display changed by the change effect, and the change of the display mode is undecided. , It may be impossible or difficult to determine during the execution of the suggestion effect whether the change to the specific color display different from the white display is confirmed.

FIG. 32-2 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. These fluctuation patterns may be prepared in advance so as to be usable in place of a part or all of the fluctuation patterns in the above-described embodiment or together with a part or all of the fluctuation patterns in the above-mentioned embodiment. The plurality of fluctuation patterns differ in the special figure fluctuation time and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. The special figure fluctuation time is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game such as the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The plurality of fluctuation patterns relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK include fluctuation patterns corresponding to any of non-reach (loss), reach (loss), and jackpot. Non-reach (loss) is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "non-reach loss". Reach (loss) is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination that is not the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss". The jackpot is a case where the fixed decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "big hit". The fluctuation pattern corresponding to non-reach (loss) is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to reach (loss) is a reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot is a jackpot fluctuation pattern. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. The reach fluctuation pattern and the jackpot fluctuation pattern include a "normal" fluctuation pattern in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, and a super reach after the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed. It includes a variation pattern of "super" in which the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that develops into the reach effect and becomes the super reach is executed. The reach production that becomes the super reach includes the reach production of Super A and Super B, which have different production modes.

FIG. 32-3 shows an example of determining the fluctuation pattern. Examples of determining the variation pattern are the jackpot variation pattern determination example 87AK01 shown in FIG. 32-3 (A), the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 shown in FIG. 32-3 (B1), and FIG. It includes 87AK03, which is an example of determining the loss fluctuation pattern shown in B2) (during a short time). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination example 87AK01 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is “big hit”. Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display becomes “loss” in the normal state where the time reduction control is not performed. Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (during time reduction) 87AK03 corresponds to a case where the display result of the variable display becomes "loss" in the time reduction state in which the time reduction control is performed. In the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, when the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" or when the time reduction control is not performed and the time reduction control becomes "missing", the time reduction control is performed. The fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit or loss is determined by using the selected fluctuation pattern determination table according to the case where “loss” occurs during the time reduction performed. When determining the variation pattern, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the variation pattern is read from the variation random number buffer. The random number buffer for variation can store the extracted random number value when the start winning determination process is executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. The effect control CPU 120 compares the random number value for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation with the determination value preset in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, among the range of the determination values assigned for each variation pattern, the variation pattern to be used is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random number value for determining the variation pattern. It should be noted that, by a process separate from the determination of the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the reach mode is adopted in the case of “loss”.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination example 87AK01, the number of determination values assigned to the fluctuation patterns of "super" such as fluctuation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is the fluctuation pattern of "normal" such as fluctuation pattern PA3-1. Decision values are assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of decision values is greater than the number of decision values assigned to. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02 and the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (time reduction medium) 87AK03, the number of determination values assigned to the “normal” fluctuation pattern such as the fluctuation pattern PA2-1. Is assigned a determination value to each variation pattern so as to be larger than the number of determination values assigned to the variation patterns of "super" such as variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the reach effect that becomes the super reach is not executed even if the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed, and the variable display is displayed. The jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) is higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) In 87AK02, the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the first reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. May be set to include. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the first reserved storage number. When the first reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be shortened as compared with the case where the first reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. A determined value may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern. Loss fluctuation pattern determination example (during time reduction) In 87AK03, the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value is 0, 1, or 2 or more in the second reserved storage number. May be set to include. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the average variable display time (special symbol variation time) of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be made different according to the second reserved storage number. When the second reserved storage number is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, "2"), the average variable display time can be shortened as compared with the case where the second reserved storage number is less than the predetermined value. A determined value may be assigned to the fluctuation pattern. In the loss variation pattern determination example (during time reduction) 87AK03, the determination assigned to the variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is long as compared with the loss variation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02. A determined value may be assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the number of values increases. As a result, it is sufficient that the average variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be shortened when the time reduction control is performed during the time reduction, as compared with the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed.

In the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in the normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the first reserved storage number is set regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as when the value is a predetermined value (for example, “0”). Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started at normal times and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the special figure game is started regardless of the second reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data according to the first reserved storage number at the time point. Alternatively, in response to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, an example of determining the loss fluctuation pattern regardless of the second reserved storage number. (Normal time) The fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data to which the determination value is assigned differently from 87AK02. Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in the normal time and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss", the "first hold" in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (normal time) 87AK02. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by replacing "the number of stored memories" with "the number of second reserved stored items" and referring to the table data corresponding to the second number of reserved stored items.

During the time reduction when the time reduction control is performed, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special figure game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is shortened. There is a high possibility that it will be executed, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. Then, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving, the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time saving and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing", the second reserved storage number is irrespective of the first reserved storage number. The fluctuation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data as when is a predetermined value (for example, “0”). Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by referring to the table data in which the allocation of the determination value is different from that of the loss variation pattern determination example (during the time saving) 87AK03 regardless of the number of first reserved storages. Alternatively, if the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started during the time reduction and the display result of the variable display becomes "loss", the "second" in the loss fluctuation pattern determination example (time reduction) 87AK03. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by replacing "the number of reserved storages" with "the first number of reserved storages" and referring to the table data corresponding to the first number of reserved storages.

FIGS. 32-4 (A1) to (A4) show active display examples relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The active display can be displayed in different display modes such as display colors. In this active display example, four display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for active display. The number of display images that can be used for active display is not limited to four, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKC1 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in white. The display image 87AKC2 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in blue. The display image 87AKC3 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in green. The display image 87AKC4 is an effect image when the character indicating the coin is displayed in red. In the active display, as a normal display mode, a white display of a character indicating a coin is performed by the display image 87AKC1. The change effect includes a case where the display color of the active display is blue, green, or red. Of these, when the display color is red, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display color is blue or green. When the display color is green, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the display color is blue. As described above, the active display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes such as a white display, a blue display, a green display, and a red display. Further, the active display can be displayed in a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4. The active display may be displayed in a different display mode together with the display color or instead of the display color, depending on the type, size, shape, pattern, and other display modes of any effect image.

FIGS. 32-4 (B1) to (B3) show examples of suggestive effects relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The suggestion effect can be executed with different effect modes including the display mode, such as a character. In this suggestion effect example, three display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the suggestion effect. The number of display images that can be used for the suggestion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKD1 is an effect image in the case where the character showing the coin explodes in the active display. The display image 87AKD2 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin emits light in the active display. The display image 87AKD3 is an effect image in the case where the character indicating the coin is rotated in the active display. In the suggestion effect, the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the active display is changed by executing the change effect differs depending on the execution timing and the effect mode. Further, depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the ratio of which of the plurality of display modes the active display display mode changes after the execution of the change effect differs. As described above, the suggestion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as an effect mode in which any of the displayed images 87 AKD 1 to 87 AKD 3 is displayed.

FIGS. 32-5 (A1) to (A3) show an example of a cut-in effect relating to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The cut-in effect can be executed at a predetermined timing during execution of the reach effect, which is the super reach, after the reach is established in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode. In the cut-in effect, for example, an effect image of a character that notifies a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The cut-in effect is a ratio according to whether or not it was executed along with the reach effect that becomes super reach, and a ratio according to the effect mode when it is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" and the big hit game state. Foretell that it will be controlled by. The cut-in effect is the content of the message by the character, the type of the character, the size, the shape, the pattern, the color, the type of the frame that becomes the outer frame, the size, the shape, the pattern, the color, the type of the effect display, the size, the shape, the pattern, It suffices if it can be executed in a different production mode depending on the color and other display modes of any production image.

In the cut-in effect example of FIGS. 32-5 (A1) to (A3), three display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the cut-in effect. The number of display images that can be used for the cut-in effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKE1 is an effect image when displaying a character that notifies the message of "???". The display image 87AKE2 is an effect image when displaying a character that notifies the message of "chance !!". The display image 87AKE3 is an effect image when displaying a character that notifies the message of "super heat !!". The ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the ratio of notifying the message of "super heat !!" differ depending on the display mode of the active display. As described above, the cut-in effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the effect mode of the message notified by displaying any of the displayed images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. Further, the cut-in effect can be executed by a predetermined mode such as an effect mode for notifying the message of "super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3.

FIGS. 32-5 (B1) to (B3) show examples of promotion effects related to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. The promotion effect can be executed at the final stage of the reach effect, which is the super reach. By executing the promotion effect, the player's movements such as the movement of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is the V controller, are promoted. The tilting operation for tilting the operating rod of the stick controller 31A may include a pulling operation for tilting the operating rod toward the front side. In the promotion effect, for example, an effect image that is a V-con image imitating the stick controller 31A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Along with the V-con image, a meter image notifying the remaining period for effectively detecting the movement of the player may be displayed. A character image for notifying the message "Close !!" may be displayed together with the V-con image. By displaying such a V-con image, a meter image, a character image, or an effect image including a part or all of these, the operation of the player who is the pulling operation of the V controller may be promoted. In the promotion effect, the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes is different depends on whether or not the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit game state. The promotion effect may be executed in a different effect mode depending on the size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of the arbitrary effect image for the V-con image, the meter image, and the character image.

In the promotion effect example of FIGS. 32-5 (B1) to (B3), three display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect. The number of effect images that can be used for the promotion effect is not limited to three, and may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. The display image 87AKF1 is an effect image in the case of a small V-con display that displays a small-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF2 is an effect image in the case of a medium V-con display for displaying a medium-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. The display image 87AKF3 is an effect image in the case of a large V-con display that displays a large-sized V-con image together with a meter image and a character image. For the promotion effect, the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence / absence of the cut-in effect and the effect mode, or the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence / absence of the change effect and the execution timing. Alternatively, the ratio of the large V-con display may be different depending on the presence or absence of the suggestive effect and the mode of the effect. In the reach effect that is the super reach, when the movement of the player that is the pulling operation of the V controller is detected in response to the promotion effect, the final notification effect that is the operation effect is executed. As described above, the promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes, such as an effect mode according to the size of the V-con display displaying any of the displayed images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. Further, the promotion effect can be executed by a special mode such as a large V-con display effect mode using the display image 87AKF3.

FIG. 32-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the final stop symbol and the like are determined (step 87AKS021). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly generated by setting the transmission of the command at the start of variation of the special symbol when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random number value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is ". It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "loss". Become. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121. By referring to or the like, among the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Determines the same (matching) decorative symbol as the final stop symbol at. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. In the jackpot promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5, and then during the jackpot gaming state or the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probable change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", in step 126AKS011, it is decided whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may be broken. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. The player can recognize that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In addition, after the decorative symbol is re-variated in the re-lottery effect, the decorative symbol of the non-probability change jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed, so that it may not be notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in step 126AKS011 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined in step 87AKS021, the effect determination process is executed (step 87AKS022). In the effect determination process, it is sufficient that the final display image, which is the final display mode of the active display, the change pattern used for the change effect, the suggestion effect, the cut-in effect, the promotion effect, and the like can be determined. Subsequently, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 87AKS023). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses it as a usage pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns and set them as usage patterns in response to the execution settings of various effects by the effect determination process in step 87AKS022. For a plurality of effect control patterns, a change effect control pattern for executing a change effect, a suggestion effect control pattern for executing a suggestion effect, a cut-in effect control pattern for executing a cut-in effect, and a promotion effect are executed. The promotion effect control pattern for the purpose may be included. As the effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effects, a plurality of effect control patterns may be individually determined, or a single effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the execution settings of various effects. The effect control pattern may be determined all at once.

When the effect control pattern is determined by step 87AKS023, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step 87AKS024). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 87AKS025). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After setting the variable start in step 87AKS025, the hold display such as the first hold display in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and the second hold display in the second hold display area 87AKB2 corresponds to the start of the variable display. And so on (step 87AKS026). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), in the first hold display area 87AKB1, the display part (display part at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested). , The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), in the second hold display area 87AKB2, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested). , The second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. The stored contents of the hold display data storage unit may be shifted in accordance with the shift of the hold display. In addition, settings for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 are made in response to the deleted hold display. As a result, with the start of the variable display, it is possible to start the display of the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area 87AKA1.

If both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "0" and the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize or the second starting winning prize, the first is A setting for updating the active display in the active display area 87AKA1 may be made without updating the 1-hold display or the second hold display. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may start the active display, which is a round plain and white display, in the active display area 87AKA1 as a normal display mode in the active display. After updating the hold display or the like in step 87AKS026, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step 87AKS027), and then the variable display start setting process ends. ..

FIG. 32-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process as the effect determination process. In the effect determination process, the final display image of the active display is determined (step 87AKS101). The final display image of the active display is an effect image that is finally displayed as the active display. In step 87AKS101, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4 in accordance with the case where the display mode of the active display is not changed or is changed. After that, the change pattern of the active display is determined (step 87AKS102). The change pattern of the active display is used for a change effect that changes the display mode of the active display. The change pattern of the active display is an effect pattern in which the effect mode of the change effect can be specified, and a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121. In step 87AKS102, in order to determine the change pattern of the active display, it is determined whether or not there is a change effect. Whether or not there is a change effect is either "with change" or "no change" in which the change effect is executed, depending on the comparison result between the pre-change image and the final display image, which is the display mode when the active display is started. Is decided on. For example, the pre-change image and the final display image are compared, and if they are different display images, it is determined that there is a change effect to execute the change effect. When the variable display is started without the pre-change image and the final display image matching, the display of the active display effect image is changed directly or stepwise to the final display image by executing the change effect. Just do it. When the pre-change image and the final display image are the same display image, it may be determined as "no change" in which the change effect is not executed. When it is determined that there is no change in which the change effect is not executed, it may be determined without the change pattern of the active display. When it is determined that there is a change to execute the change effect, it is possible to determine a single or a plurality of change patterns corresponding to a plurality of timings at which the change effect can be executed.

Following step 87AKS102, the suggestion effect is determined (step 87AKS103). In step 87AKS103, it is possible to determine one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 according to the timing at which the change effect is executed. Further, even at the timing when the change effect is not executed, if the Gase suggestion effect is executed, it can be determined to be one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Next, as a reach effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a super that executes the reach effect in the super reach (step 87AKS104). At this time, if the reach effect in the super reach is not executed and it is determined that there is no super (step 87AKS104; No), the effect determination process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a supermarket (step 87AKS104; Yes), the cut-in effect is determined (step 87AKS105), the promotion effect is determined (step 87AKS106), and then the effect determination process is terminated.

FIG. 32-8 shows a determination example of the final display image. In step 87AKS101 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the final display image is extracted, and the final display image is determined by referring to the final display image determination table according to the variable display content based on the random number value. Just do it. As a determination example of the final display image, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK11 is determined by the determination ratio according to the variable display content as shown in FIG. 32-8. The determination example 87AK11 includes the cases of "non-reach (loss)", "normal (loss)", "super (loss)", and "big hit" as the variable display contents for determining the final display image. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the reach effect is not executed due to the non-reach fluctuation pattern among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "loss". When the variable display content is "normal (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "normal". There is. When the variable display content is "super (loss)", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "loss" and the reach effect that becomes super reach is executed by the fluctuation pattern of "super". ing. When the variable display content is "big hit", it corresponds to the case where the display result of the variable display is "big hit".

In the determination example 87AK11 shown in FIG. 32-8, the determination ratios of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images, differ depending on whether or not the variable display content is “big hit” and is controlled to the big hit gaming state. For example, the display image 87AKC1 is determined at the highest ratio when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", and the variable display content is "super (loss)" or "big hit". If, the decision rate is low. On the other hand, in the display image 87AKC4, when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", the determination ratio cannot be determined at 0/100 (= 0%), and the variable display is variable. When the content is "big hit", the decision rate is the highest. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the variable display content, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the highest. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKC4, but higher than that of the display images 87AKC2 and 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display images 87AKC4 and 87AKC3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKC1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. As described above, it may be possible to suggest that the active display is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at different ratios depending on the display mode such as the display color.

FIG. 32-9 shows a configuration example of the change pattern used for the change effect and the executable timing of the change effect. In the configuration example of the change pattern shown in FIG. 32-9 (A), change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 are prepared in advance as a plurality of change patterns that can be used for the change effect. The plurality of change patterns correspond to the combination of the active display display image (pre-change image) before the change effect is executed and the active display display image (post-change image) after the change effect is executed. For example, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC2 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-2 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-3 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC1 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-4 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC2 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC3 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-5 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC2 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change pattern 87AKP1-6 is used when the pre-change image is the display image 87AKC3 and the post-change image is the display image 87AKC4 due to the change effect. The change effect can be executed at a single timing or at a plurality of timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed according to the fluctuation pattern.

FIG. 32-9 (B1) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed in the case of non-reach (loss) corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. In the case of non-reach (loss), the change effect can be executed at the timing before the reach is established, which is the first timing. As described above, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is not in the reach mode, the change effect can be executed at a single timing while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

FIG. 32-9 (B2) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed corresponding to the “normal” variation pattern. When the reach effect that is the normal reach is executed, the change effect can be executed before the reach is established, which is the first timing, or after the reach is established. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the timing of two times while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

FIG. 32-9 (B3) shows the timing at which the change effect can be executed when the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed corresponding to the variation pattern of the “super”. When the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at the timing of the first timing before the reach is established, after the reach is established, at the time of super development, and at the timing of the second timing of the cut-in effect. Is. In this way, when the variable display of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode and the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed, the change effect can be executed at four timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. The first timing and the second timing may be any timing as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. Further, the present invention is not limited to these timings, and it is sufficient that the change effect can be executed at a single or a plurality of timings while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. In the active display area 87AKA1, the display of the effect image to be the active display is started in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. After the active display is started in this way, the cut-in effect can be executed before the operation effect is executed in the reach effect that becomes the super reach.

FIG. 32-10 shows an example of determining the change pattern. In step 87AKS102 of the effect determination process, a single or a plurality of random values for determining the change pattern are extracted, and based on the random values, the change pattern determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display. The change pattern corresponding to the timing may be determined. The change pattern determination examples include a "no super" determination example corresponding to a fluctuation pattern other than the "super" fluctuation pattern and a "super presence" determination example corresponding to a "super" fluctuation pattern. It suffices if the determination example is included.

FIG. 32-10 (A) shows 87AK21, which is a determination example of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established, as a determination example of “no supermarket”. In the determination example 87AK21, the presence / absence and type of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. If it is determined without a change pattern, the change effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the white display, which is the normal mode as the display mode of the active display, does not change, so 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to the fact that the change effect is not executed. Determined at the rate of no change pattern. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, the change pattern at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponds to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the blue display as the display mode of the active display. It is decided to be 87AKP1-1. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, the change pattern is at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the green display as the display mode of the active display. Determined to be 87AKP1-2. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the change pattern is at a ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to changing the white display, which is the normal mode, to the red display as the display mode of the active display. Determined to be 87AKP1-3.

FIG. 32-10 (B) shows a determination example 87AK22 of a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established and the second timing during the cut-in effect as a determination example of “with supermarket”. There is. In the determination example 87AK22, the presence / absence and type of the change pattern corresponding to the first timing and the second timing are determined according to the final display image in the active display. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the white display, which is the normal mode as the display mode of the active display, does not change, so 100/100 (= 100%) corresponding to the fact that the change effect is not executed. The ratio is determined without the change pattern of the first timing and the second timing. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the white display, which is the normal mode, is changed to the red display as the display mode of the active display. In this case, the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 and the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-5 is determined at a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), and is 30/100 (= 30%). The combination of the change pattern 87AKP1-2 of the first timing and the change pattern 87AKP1-6 of the second timing is determined at the ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), and there is no change pattern of the first timing and the second. The combination with the timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 is determined, and the combination of the first timing change pattern 87AKP1-3 with no second timing change pattern is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%). In this way, the presence / absence of the change effect and the change pattern corresponding to the timing are determined at different ratios depending on the display mode of the active display. Further, it is sufficient that it is possible to suggest the final display mode of the active display at a different ratio depending on the presence / absence of the change effect and the change pattern in response to a single or a plurality of timings during the execution of the variable display.

In the determination example 87AK21, the determination ratio of the second timing change pattern 87AKP1-1 is 0/100 (= 0%). As a result, at the second timing, the active display does not change from the white display in the normal mode to the blue display. Since the second timing is the cut-in production during the reach production that becomes the super reach, the expectation that the game will be controlled by the jackpot game state is increasing. If the blue display changes to a low expectation at such a timing, it suggests that it is unlikely to be controlled by the jackpot game state, and there is a risk that the player will be awakened by giving discomfort. There is. Therefore, at the second timing, it is set not to execute the change effect in which the active display changes from the white display to the blue display. As a result, at the timing when the expectation for the big hit game state is increasing, it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the discomfort of the change effect suggesting that the expectation is low.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK21, when the first timing is determined by the change pattern PA1-3, the second timing is determined without the change pattern, so that the change effect is not executed at the second timing. Since the change pattern PA1-3 changes the active display from the white display of the display image 87AKC1 to the red display of the display image 87AKC4, the display mode of the active display cannot be further changed. In this way, before the cut-in effect that is the second timing, the change effect is not executed at the second timing in response to the case where the display mode of the active display is the red display that is the specific mode, so that the active display is active. The display mode of the display is not changed. Further, when the change effect is executed at the first timing before the second timing, the display mode of the active display can be changed to the red display, so that the degree of freedom of the change pattern in the change effect is increased. , Various productions can be performed. Even if the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode such as a red display at the first timing, if a special effect such as a promotion effect is executed as a cut-in effect, the active display is displayed at the second timing. The display mode of the active display may be further changed at the second timing, such as changing the display mode of the above to a gold display.

FIG. 32-11 shows a determination example of the suggestion effect including the Gase suggestion effect. In step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, if it is determined whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect, which is whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect, corresponding to the timing when the change effect is not executed among the first timing and the second timing. Good. At this time, for example, a random number value for determining the execution of the Gase suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the Gase suggestion effect is executed by referring to the Gase suggestion effect execution decision table according to the timing when the change effect is not executed. You can decide whether or not to use it. As an example of determining the execution of the Gase suggestion effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK31 is based on the determination ratio according to the first timing and the second timing as shown in FIG. 32-11 (A). Further, in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining the suggestion effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the suggestion effect determination table is referred to according to the change pattern used in the change effect. Alternatively, the effect image to be used for the suggestion effect corresponding to a plurality of timings may be determined. As a determination example of the suggestion effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK32 is determined by the determination ratio according to the change pattern as shown in FIG. 32-11 (B).

In the determination example 87AK31 shown in FIG. 32-11 (A), it is determined to be either "executed" or not executed "execution" corresponding to the first timing and the second timing. .. However, in the case of "no super", the variable display ends before the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, is reached, so it is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing. In the determination example 87AK31, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the Gase suggestion effect differs depending on whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, in the first timing, it is determined as "executed" at a rate of 10/100 (= 10%) and "without execution" at a rate of 90/100 (= 90%). In the second timing, the ratio of 0/100 (= 0%) is determined to be "executed", and the ratio of 100/100 (= 100%) is determined to be "not executed". As a result, there is a limitation as a limit that the Gase suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined ratio in the range of the first timing, but the Gase suggestion effect is not executed in the range of the second timing after the first timing. It should be noted that the second timing is not limited to the restriction that the Gase suggestion effect is not executed, and the second timing may be limited to the execution ratio of the Gase suggestion effect being lower than that of the first timing. By providing these restrictions, in the second timing in which the expectation of being controlled by the jackpot game state is increasing, the event that the change effect is not executed even if the suggestion effect is executed is stopped or reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the discomfort of the Gase suggestion effect at the timing when the expectation for the big hit game state is increasing.

The determination example 87AK32 shown in FIG. 32-11 (B) includes a case where the determination ratios of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 used for the suggestion effect differ depending on the change pattern used in the change effect. For example, when there is no change pattern corresponding to the Gase suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Yes, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 0/100 (= 0%). In this case, the display image 87 AKD3 is not determined. Therefore, when the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed by always executing the change effect without executing the Gase suggestion effect. In the case of any of the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD2 is 30/100. (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKD3 is 60/100 (= 60%). In the change patterns 87AKP1-3, 87AKP1-5, and 87AKP1-6, the changed image is the display image 87AKC4, and the display mode of the active display is changed to the red display. Due to the difference in the determination ratio according to the change pattern, when the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is the highest. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD2 is executed, the expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is lower than that of the display image 87AKD3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKD1. It gets higher. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the display mode of the active display changes to the red display due to the change effect is the lowest. As described above, the suggestion effect may suggest that the display mode of the active display changes to a specific mode at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like. Further, the suggestion effect may suggest whether or not the display mode of the active display changes at a different rate depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like.

FIG. 32-12 shows a determination example of the cut-in effect. In step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, a random value for determining the cut-in effect is extracted, and based on the random value, the cut-in effect determination table is referred to according to the final display image in the active display, thereby performing the cut-in effect. It suffices to decide whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and whether or not to execute the effect image to be used when executing the cut-in effect. As a determination example of the cut-in effect, there may be a case where the determination example 87AK41 is based on the determination ratio according to the final display image in the active display as shown in FIG. 32-12. In the determination example 87AK41, the presence / absence and type of the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined according to the final display image in the active display. If it is determined that there is no display image used for the cut-in effect, the cut-in effect is not executed. For example, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKE1 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (= 80%) without the display image and at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%). In this case, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE2 and 87AKE3 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the cut-in effect using these display images is not executed. When the final display image is the display image 87AKC2, it is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%) without the display image, and at a ratio of 40/100 (= 40%), it is determined to be the display image 87AKE1. The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of / 100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%). When the final display image is the display image 87AKC3, it is determined at a ratio of 10/100 (= 10%) without the display image, and at a ratio of 30/100 (= 30%), it is determined to be the display image 87AKE1. The display image 87AKE2 is determined at a ratio of / 100 (= 40%), and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 20/100 (= 20%).

In the determination example 87AK41, when the final display image is the display image 87AKC4, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE1 without the display image is 0/100 (= 0%), and the ratio of 20/100 (= 20%). The display image 87AKE2 is determined by, and the display image 87AKE3 is determined at a ratio of 80/100 (= 80%). In this case, the cut-in effect is always executed, and either the display image 87AKE2 or 87AKE3 is used. As described above, the presence / absence of the cut-in effect and the display image used for the cut-in effect are determined at different ratios depending on the display mode of the active display. Further, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the final display mode in the active display differs depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image or the like. Therefore, for example, when the change effect is executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing, it is possible to suggest the final display mode of the active display at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the cut-in effect. In addition, when the change effect is not executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the cut-in effect at a different ratio depending on the display mode of the active display.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK41, the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is not determined because the determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1 and is displayed. It can be determined when any of the images 87AKC2 to 87AKC4. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the predetermined mode by the display of the display image 87AKE3, the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed. Become.

The cut-in effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the change pattern at the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing. For example, when the change effect is not executed at the second timing, the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect may be determined at a high rate. According to such a setting of the determination ratio, when the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE1 is executed, the ratio that the change effect is not executed at the second timing becomes high, and the display mode of the active display is hard to change. Become. As described above, the effect mode of the cut-in effect may include an effect mode in which the execution rate of the change effect is low and the display mode of the active display is unlikely to change.

FIGS. 32-13 to 32-15 show a determination example of the promotion effect corresponding to the feature portions 87AK to 89AK. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, a random number value for determining the promotion effect is extracted, and based on the random number value, the promotion effect determination table is referred to according to the display result of the variable display and used for the promotion effect. The production image may be determined. As a determination example of the promotion effect, when the determination example 87AK51 relating to the feature portion 87AK shown in FIG. 32-13 is used, and when the determination example 88AK01 relating to the feature portion 88AK shown in FIG. Of the cases where the determination example 89AK01 is obtained, at least one of the cases may be sufficient. Depending on the success or failure of a specific condition relating to the progress of the game or the production, or depending on the success or failure of the special condition not related to the progress of the game or the production, each decision example may be switched. For example, if the number of executions of the variable display is within the specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if it is outside the specific range, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01. .. Further, if the effect mode is the normal mode, the promotion effect is determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, and if the special mode is different from the normal mode, the promotion effect may be determined by the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01. ..

In the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 87AK shown in FIG. 32-13, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the cut-in effect are performed. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image used for. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the display image is displayed. The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (= 40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (= 80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is “missing”, the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the cut-in effect, when the display image is 87AKE1 and when the display image is 87AKE2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss" and is used for the promotion effect. The determination rate of image 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. .. By setting the determination ratio in this way, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player overlooks the cut-in effect, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled to some extent depends on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is due to the display of the display image 87AKF3. Can be determined up to.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 87AK51, when there is no corresponding display image without executing the cut-in effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is performed at a higher ratio than when the cut-in effect is executed. Will be executed. When the cut-in effect using the display image 87AKE3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. Further, in the cut-in effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK51, even if the display results of the variable display are the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. The proportions are different. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no display image in which the cut-in effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE1 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", there is no display image of the cut-in effect, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3. The ratio of display becomes high. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" are compared, in this case, there is no display image of the cut-in effect, the display image 87AKE1, the display image 87AKE2, and the display image 87AKE3. As an effect mode of the promotion effect, the ratio of displaying the display image 87AKF3 becomes high. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect mode and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the cut-in effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

In the decision example 88AK01 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 88AK shown in FIG. 32-14, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the active display are determined. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the final display image. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", there is no execution of the change effect, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%). ), The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit", there is no execution of the change effect, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%). The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). Regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is "missing" or "big hit", if the change effect is not executed and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC1, the display image 87AKF1, The determination ratio of 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the display image is displayed. The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 70/100 (= 70%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). is there. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is It is 40/100 (= 40%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 80/100 (= 80%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC2, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 30/100 (= 30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 70/100 (= 70%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the display image is displayed. The determination ratio of 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). is there. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is It is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 50/100 (= 50%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 30/100 (= 30%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC3, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 Is 20/100 (= 20%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%).

In the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. , The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10). %). When the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%). If the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 95/100 (= 95%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 5/100 (= 5%). .. When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). ..

In the determination example of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. It will be the highest. For example, when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" regardless of whether the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2 or other than the display image 87AKC2. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 used for the promotion effect is the highest. In addition, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or at the first timing and the second timing, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" regardless of the final display image of the active display. Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF3 is determined regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed, the timing, and the final display image in the active display. The ratio is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the change effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player cannot determine the timing of the change effect, it is expected that the effect mode of the promotion effect will be controlled to the jackpot game state depending on whether or not the display image 87AKF3 is displayed. The degree can be determined to some extent.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 88AK01, when the change effect is not executed or when the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the change effect is executed only at the second timing or the first timing. And the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than the case where the change effect is executed at the second timing. When the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. Further, in the change effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the presence / absence of execution and the timing. Therefore, it is possible to suggest an effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the display results of the variable display are the same, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. May occur. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is not executed, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 40/100 (= 40%) or 50/100 (= 50). %). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%) or 20/100. (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 50/100 (= 50%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%) or It is 95/100 (= 95%). Even when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 differs depending on whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing. When the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF3 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the display image 87AKF3 is not determined. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed only at the second timing or when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the display image 87AKF3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence and timing of execution of the change effect and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the change effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions. Further, the timing at which the change effect is executed differs, such as whether or not the change effect is executed at the second timing, depending on whether or not the promotion effect is executed in a special mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. ..

In addition, in the determination ratio of the determination example 88AK01, even if the execution presence / absence and timing of the change effect are the same in addition to the display result of the variable display, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined according to the final display image of the active display. 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 may be determined at different ratios. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is not executed, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%) when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC1. ), On the other hand, it is 50/100 (= 50%) in the case other than the display image 87AKC1. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the first timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 70/100 (when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC2). = 70%), whereas it is 80/100 (= 80%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC2. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed only at the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC3). = 30%), whereas it is 20/100 (= 20%) in cases other than the display image 87AKC3. When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10 when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4. While it is / 100 (= 10%), it is 5/100 (= 5%) when the display image is other than 87AKC4. Even when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", even if the execution presence / absence and timing of the change effect are the same, the ratio of determining the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 differs depending on the final display image of the active display. .. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the display mode of the active display and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the active display and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

In the decision example 89AK01 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 89AK shown in FIG. 32-15, in addition to whether the display result of the variable display is “miss” or “big hit”, it is used for whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and for the suggestion effect. The determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect differs depending on the display image to be displayed. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 80/100 (= 80%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 30/100 (= 30%), and the display image 87AKF2 The determination ratio is 30/100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 40/100 (= 40%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 60/100 (= 60%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. It is / 100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 20/100 (= 20%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 20/100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 20. It is / 100 (= 20%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 60/100 (= 60%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 40/100 (= 40%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 30. It is / 100 (= 30%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 30/100 (= 30%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 10. It is / 100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 80/100 (= 80%). When the display result of the variable display is "missing" and the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90. It is / 100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). When the display result of the variable display is "big hit" and the display image 87AKE2 of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is It is 10/100 (= 10%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is “missing”, the determination ratio other than the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. For example, when there is no display image of the suggestion effect, when the display image is 87AKD1, and when the display image is 87AKD2, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss" and is used for the promotion effect. The decision rate of 87AKF1 is the highest. Further, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, the display result of the variable display corresponds to "loss", and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKE2 used for the promotion effect is the highest. On the other hand, in the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is the highest regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. By setting the determination ratio in this way, when the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF3 is executed, the expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the highest. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF2 is executed, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot gaming state is lower than that of the display image 87AKF3, but higher than that of the display image 87AKF1. When the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state is controlled is the lowest. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the promotion effect has the highest expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state in the case of the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3. As a result, even if the player overlooks the suggestive effect, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled to a certain extent is increased depending on whether or not the effect mode of the promotion effect is due to the display of the display image 87AKF3. Can be determined.

Due to the difference in the determination ratio in the determination example 89AK01, when there is no corresponding display image without executing the suggestion effect, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is executed at a higher rate than when the suggestion effect is executed. To. When the suggestion effect using the display image 87AKD3 is executed, the promotion effect using the display image 87AKF1 is not executed, and the promotion effect using any of the display images 87AKF2 and 87AKF3 is executed. As described above, the display image used for the promotion effect is determined at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. Further, in the suggestion effect, the ratio of the effect mode by displaying the effect image in the promotion effect is different depending on the effect mode by displaying the effect image. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the effect mode of the promotion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode.

In the determination ratio of the determination example 89AK01, even if the display results of the variable display are the same, each of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode. Is different. For example, among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when there is no display image that does not execute the suggestion effect, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 10/100 (= 10%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD1 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 20/100 (= 20%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD2 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 30/100 (= 30%). Among the cases where the display result of the variable display is "missing", when the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect is used, the ratio of determining the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%). Therefore, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the display image 87AKF2 is displayed as the effect mode of the promotion effect as the suggestive effect is not displayed, the display image 87AKD1, the display image 87AKD2, and the display image 87AKD3. The ratio becomes high. Similarly, if the determination ratios when the display result of the variable display is "big hit" are compared, in this case, the display image is not displayed, the display image is 87AKD1, the display image is 87AKD2, and the display image is 87AKD3. As an effect mode of the effect, the ratio of displaying the display image 87AKF3 increases. By setting such a determination ratio, it is possible to make the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot game state different depending on the combination of the presence / absence of execution of the suggestion effect and the effect mode and the effect mode of the promotion effect. By grasping the combination of the suggestion effect and the promotion effect, the player can recognize in detail the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state, rather than grasping only the effect mode of the promotion effect. Increased interest in various productions.

FIG. 32-16 shows a determination example of the promotion effect as a modification. For example, in the case of the cut-in effect display image 87AKE3 in the decision example 87AK51 of the promotion effect regarding the feature portion 87AK, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are used at a ratio corresponding to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may decide on either. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKE3, FIG. 32-16 shows an example of determining the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It suffices if it becomes the determination example 87AK61 shown.

In the decision example 87AK61 of the promotion effect shown in FIG. 32-16, when the display result of the variable display is “missing” among the display images 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Regardless, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 90%). = 10%). On the other hand, in the case of the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image used for the promotion effect is according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratios of 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 are different. In such a case, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same, while the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1. ), If the set value is 2, it is 30/100 (= 30%), if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), and if the set value is 4, it is 20/100. (= 20%), if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it is 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it is 90/100 (= 90%).

In the determination ratio of the determination example 87AK61, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to the display image 87AKF2 or 87AKF3 is set as the pachinko game. It is made different according to the set value in the machine 1. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode by the display of the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the effect mode of the promotion effect is the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the display mode is increased. Therefore, when the effect mode of the cut-in effect is the display of the display image 87AKE3, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player in the case where the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Expectation, which is a set value, increases.

The effect mode of the promotion effect is an effect mode as a predetermined mode for notifying the message of "extreme heat !!" by displaying the display image 87AKF3. The ratio of the promotion effect to such a predetermined mode can be grasped by repeatedly executing the cut-in effect and the promotion effect with a plurality of variable displays in which the display result is a "big hit". In the variable display in which the display result is a "big hit", the player can set the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by grasping the ratio in which the promotion effect is a predetermined mode when the display image 87AKE3 of the cut-in effect is used. Can be recognized. If the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage, the display result of the variable display tends to be a “big hit” and is easily controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, a player who expects to add game value such as winning a prize ball expects that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high degree of advantage, so that the display result becomes a "big hit" a plurality of times. In the variable display of, the motivation to play is enhanced by making the set value recognizable from the ratio in which the promotion effect is a predetermined mode.

Even when there is no display image used for the cut-in effect, or when the display image is either 87AKE1 or 87AKE2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are used according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) having a high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" becomes high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value.

Of the 88AK01 determination examples of the promotion effect related to the feature unit 88AK, for example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4, the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Depending on the situation, the determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different. For example, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "missing", the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10. / 100 (= 10%). On the other hand, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, and the final display image of the active display is 87AKC4 and the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the display image 87AKF1 The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 2 if the set value is 1. If there is, it is 30/100 (= 30%), if the set value is 3, it is 25/100 (= 25%), and if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%). If the value is 5, it may be 15/100 (= 15%), and if the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (= 90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the promotion effect is produced. The ratio in which the effect mode is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 becomes high. Therefore, when the final display image of the active display is the display image 87AKC4 by executing the change effect at the first timing and the second timing, the promotion effect is the effect mode by the display of the display image 87AKF3. , The expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous set value for the player is high. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the change effect and the promotion effect along with the variable display of the display result as a "big hit" a plurality of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since the set value in the above can be recognized, the player's motivation to play is enhanced.

In addition, when the change effect is executed at the first timing and the second timing, even when the final display image of the active display is other than the display image 87AKC4, the promotion effect is performed according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratios of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the above may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) having a high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value. In addition, even when the change effect is not executed, or when it is executed only at the first timing or only at the second timing, the display images 87AKF1 to be used for the promotion effect according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of 87AKF3 may be different.

Among 89AK01, which is a determination example of the promotion effect related to the feature portion 89AK, for example, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect is determined according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be different. For example, in the case of the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (regardless of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1). = 0%), the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 90/100 (= 90%), and the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 10/100 (= 10%). On the other hand, among the cases where the display image 87AKD3 of the suggestion effect is, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF1 is 0/100 (= 0%), which is the same. The determination ratio of the display image 87AKF2 is 35/100 (= 35%) if the set value is 1, 30/100 (= 30%) if the set value is 2, and the set value is 3. If it is 25/100 (= 25%), if the set value is 4, it is 20/100 (= 20%), and if the set value is 5, it is 15/100 (= 15%). If the set value is 6, it may be 10/100 (= 10%). Correspondingly, the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is 65/100 (= 65%) when the set value is 1, and 70/100 (= 70%) when the set value is 2. If the set value is 3, it is 75/100 (= 75%), if the set value is 4, it is 80/100 (= 80%), and if the set value is 5, it is 85/100 (= 85%). ), And if the set value is 6, it may be 90/100 (= 90%). By setting such a determination ratio, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect mode of the promotion effect tends to be the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF2, and as the set value increases, the promotion effect is produced. The ratio in which the effect mode is the effect mode by displaying the display image 87AKF3 becomes high. Therefore, when the effect mode of the suggestion effect is the display of the display image 87AKD3, the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is advantageous for the player when the effect mode is the display of the display image 87AKF3. Expectation, which is a value, increases. In addition, if the player can grasp the ratio of the promotion effect to a predetermined mode by repeatedly executing the suggestion effect and the promotion effect along with the variable display of the display result as a "big hit" a plurality of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since the set value in the above can be recognized, the player's motivation to play is enhanced.

Even when there is no display image used for the suggestion effect, or when the display image is either 87AKD1 or 87AKD2, the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect are used according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The decision ratio may be different. Even when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be different depending on the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the determination ratio of the display image 87AKF3 is set to increase as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a set value having a high advantage for the player. You may. According to such a setting, after the promotion effect of the predetermined mode (large V-con display) having a high expectation is executed by the display of the display image 87AKF3, the ratio that the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a set value having a high advantage. Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display is "missing", it is possible to improve the game interest by increasing the player's expectation for the set value.

The determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 which is the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence / absence of the suggestion effect, and the determination ratio of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Of the presence / absence of the cut-in effect, the determination rate of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determination rate of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing". In this case, it may be set differently according to the set value in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "missing", the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a high advantage for the player in the ratio determined to the production mode with a high expectation of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. It may be set to be higher as it becomes the set value. According to such a setting, after the high-expectation effect, which is the effect of the effect mode with high expectation, is executed, the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. It is possible to increase the expectation that the set value is a set value having a high degree of advantage. In general, if the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" after the high expectation effect of the effect mode with high expectation is executed, the player's expectation once raised by the effect is variably displayed. Since the number of players decreases sharply depending on the display result of, the player is likely to lose or lose the motivation to continue the game. On the other hand, as the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes "missing" increases after the high expectation effect is executed, the expectation that the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a highly advantageous set value is increased. By increasing the value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game so that the player is motivated to continue the game.

It should be noted that the determination ratio of the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC3 which is the final display image of the active display, the determination ratio of the change patterns 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1-6 corresponding to a plurality of timings, the presence / absence of the suggestion effect, and the determination of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. Of the ratio, the presence / absence of the cut-in effect, the determination ratio of the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3, and the determination ratio of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display is "missing". In this case, the set value in the pachinko game machine 1 may be set differently depending on whether the set value is equal to or more than the specific set value or less than the specific set value. For example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 or more, it is more likely to be controlled to the jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "missing" than when it is less than 4. The decision rate may be increased. Alternatively, for example, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is controlled to the jackpot game state when the display result of the variable display is "missing" than when it is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5). The rate of determining the production mode with a high degree of expectation may be increased. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5), the determination ratio is 0/100 (= 0%) when the display result of the variable display is "missing", which is a big hit. Regarding the effect mode to be finalized, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, if the display result of the variable display is “missing”, it may be set so as to be determinable at a predetermined ratio. According to this setting, when the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6 (any of 1 to 5), the effect of the effect mode in which the big hit is confirmed is executed, and the display result of the variable display becomes "missing". In that case, since the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be 6, the gaming interest can be improved so that the player can be motivated to continue the game.

In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the case of a specific setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a setting value other than the specific setting value. In this case, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the set value is the specific set value. If it is a specific set value, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a set value other than the specific set value, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. As described above, in the range where the set value is the specific set value, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the set value is other than the specific set value, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios depending on whether or not it is a special period. For example, in the case of a special period, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of a period other than the special period. In this case, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than in the range of the special period. If it is a special period, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if it is a period other than the special period, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range of the special period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range other than the special period, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

It is not limited to whether or not it is a special period, and it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at a different ratio depending on whether or not an arbitrary special condition is satisfied. For example, when the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the special condition is not satisfied. In this case, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is lower than the range where the special condition is satisfied. If the special condition is satisfied, it can be executed at a predetermined ratio, and if the special condition is not satisfied, a setting suggestion effect that is not executed may be provided. In this way, within the range where the special condition is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, in the range where the special condition is not satisfied, there is a limit as a limit that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. The special condition may be any condition that can be satisfied according to the progress or history of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the result of the determination or determination of the game, or the progress or history or the effect of the effect in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be an arbitrary condition that can be satisfied according to the judgment or determination of. The effect is not limited to the setting suggestion effect, and any effect may be executed at different ratios depending on whether or not a preset condition is satisfied, and whether such a condition is satisfied. The production mode may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied, or the execution timing may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not such a condition is satisfied. .. In addition, any effect may be limited as a limit that a specific effect is not executed in the range where the preset restriction condition is satisfied, or compared with the range where the restriction condition is not satisfied. There may be a limit as a limit that the execution rate is lowered and it is difficult to be executed.

FIG. 32-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the variable display in-effect processing, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step 87AKS041). In step 87AKS041, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display is made. It may be determined that the time has passed. As described above, the passage of the variable display time may be determined as the passage of the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; No), it is determined whether or not it is the suggestion effect period for executing the suggestion effect (step 87AKS042). The suggestion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (suggestion effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the suggestion effect period (step 87AKS042; Yes), control for executing the suggestion effect is performed (step 87AKS043). In step 87AKS043, for example, various commands created based on the setting of the suggestion effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, blinking or extinguished. It suffices that the suggestion effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by the above, or by combining a part or all of them.

When it is determined in step 87AKS042 that it is not the suggestion effect period (step 87AKS042; No), or after the control in step 87AKS043 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect. (Step 87AKS044). The change effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (change effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the change effect period (step 87AKS044; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 87AKS045). As the change effect period, for example, a period before the reach is established, which is the first timing, and a period at the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, may be set in advance. At the time of the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the display mode of the active display may be changed by changing the display of the effect image in the active display area 87AKA1 in response to the execution of the cut-in effect.

When it is determined in step 87AKS044 that it is not the change effect period (step 87AKS044; No), or after the control in step 87AKS045 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. (Step 87AKS046). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the reach effect period (step 87AKS046; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (step 87AKS047).

Whether or not it is the cut-in effect period for executing the cut-in effect when it is determined in step 87AKS046 that it is not the reach effect period (step 87AKS046; No) or after the control in step 87AKS047 is executed. Is determined (step 87AKS048). The cut-in effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; Yes), control for executing the cut-in effect is performed (step 87AKS049). The cut-in effect period is before the operation effect period is determined in step 87AKS052 after the display of the effect image that becomes the active display is started by step 87AKS026 of the variable display start setting process. In addition, it may be set in advance so that the cut-in effect can be executed. With such a setting, it is sufficient that the cut-in effect can be executed after the active display is displayed and before the operation effect is executed.

The order of active display, motion effect, and cut-in effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the active display may be started after the cut-in effect is executed, and then the motion effect may be executed. Alternatively, the operation effect may be executed after the active display is started, and then the cut-in effect may be executed.

When it is determined in step 87AKS048 that it is not the cut-in effect period (step 87AKS048; No), or after the control in step 87AKS049 is executed, whether or not it is the promotion effect period for executing the promotion effect is determined. Determine (step 87AKS050). The promotion effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (cut-in effect control pattern) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the case of the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; Yes), control for executing the promotion effect is performed (step 87AKS051). The promotion effect period may be an effective detection period for effectively detecting the movement of the player as the promotion effect is executed. In the effective detection period, for example, based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A, the movement of the player who tilts the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, such as the pulling operation for the V controller, may be detected.

When it is determined in step 87AKS050 that it is not the promotion effect period (step 87AKS050; No), or after the control in step 87AKS051 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the operation effect period for executing the operation effect. (Step 87AKS052). The operation effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 87AKS023 of the variable display start setting process. In the effective detection period after the promotion effect is started, if a specific operation by the player, such as an operation of pulling the operation stick of the stick controller 31A serving as the V controller, is not detected, the operation effect period is set. It may not be started. Alternatively, even if the specific operation is not detected, the operation effect period may be started when the specific timing for the operation effect is reached. In the case of the motion effect period (step 87AKS052; Yes), control for executing the motion effect is performed (step 87AKS053).

The specific action of the player to be detected in order to execute the motion effect may be an action of tilting the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, which is different from the pulling operation such as a pushing operation with respect to the V controller. Alternatively, the player's specific action may be an action of pressing the push button 31B. The movement of the player is not limited to what can be detected, and is based on the detection result of any change or difference in the detection target, for example, the execution state of processing or control in the detection target, the shape, pattern, or color change of the detection target. Therefore, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary effect corresponding to the motion effect. A detection device capable of detecting an operation, change, difference, etc. in a detection target can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically change the state of the detection target, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. Any configuration that can be detected may be used. Alternatively, the state of the detection target may be detected by analyzing the result of photographing the detection target using a predetermined camera (video type motion capture). As an example of detecting the state of the detection target using the camera, the screen display state of the mobile terminal may be detected and the effect may be executed based on the detection result.

When it is determined in step 87AKS052 that it is not the operation effect period (step 87AKS052; No), or after the control in step 87AKS053 is executed, for example, the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Based on this, control for executing other effects during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, is performed (step 87AKS054), and the variable display effect process ends.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step 87AKS041 (step 87AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 87AKS055). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 87AKS055; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When a symbol confirmation command is received in step 87AKS055 (step 87AKS055; Yes), for example, in a variable display of a decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step 87AKS056). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 87AKS057). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the waiting process for hitting the special figure (step 87AKS058), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIGS. 32-18 to 32-22 show examples of variable display of decorative patterns and execution examples of various effects. FIG. 32-18 shows an execution example from the start of the fluctuation, which is the start of the variable display, to the execution of the suggestion effect corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established. FIG. 32-19 shows a case other than the variable end or the non-reach (loss), which is the end of the variable display in the case of non-reach (loss) after the change effect corresponding to the first timing before the reach is established is executed. An execution example of the reach establishment in which the variable display is the reach mode is shown. FIG. 32-20 corresponds to an execution example of the variable end, which is the end of the variable display in the case of normal (loss), and the second timing at the time of the cut-in effect from the super development where the reach effect, which is the super reach, is started. An execution example until the suggestion effect is executed is shown. FIG. 32-21 shows an execution example in which the promotion effect is executed after the change effect corresponding to the second timing at the time of the cut-in effect is executed. FIG. 32-22 shows an execution example from the execution of the operation effect to the end of the variable display, which is the end of the variable display.

In the effect determination process executed in step 87AKS022 of the variable display start setting process in response to the variable start of the effect execution example 87AKM01 shown in FIG. 32-18 (A), the final display image in the active display. The change pattern of the change effect, the effect mode of the suggestion effect, the effect mode of the cut-in effect, the operation mode of the promotion effect, and the like are determined. After the start of the fluctuation in the effect execution example 87AKM01, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes corresponding to before the reach is established, which is the first timing, becomes feasible. FIG. 32-18 (B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM11 in the case where the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 32-18 (B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM12 in the case where the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. FIG. 32-18 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM13 in the case where the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. As described above, the suggestion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes depending on which of the displayed images 87 AKD 1 to 87 AKD 3 is used. Of the cases where the change effect is not executed in response to the first timing, if it is determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process that the Gase suggestion effect is not executed, the suggestion effect is not executed. The variable display of the decorative pattern progresses. After the suggestion effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is executed before the reach is established, which is the first timing, the change effect may or may not be executed. Of these, when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the first timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 32-19 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM21 in the case where the change effect is not executed corresponding to the absence of the change pattern of the first timing. Since the display image 87AKC1 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM21, the display mode of the active display remains white and does not change. In this case, the suggestion effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM11 to 87AKM13 is the Gase suggestion effect executed when there is no change effect. However, in the determination example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 32-11 (B), if the suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM13 is executed, the change pattern 87AKP1-1 to 87AKP1- Since it has been decided to be one of 6, it will not be a suggestion effect.

FIG. 32-19 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM22 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM22, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 32-19 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM23 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM23, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 32-19 (A4) shows an effect execution example 87AKM24 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the first timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM24, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display mode of the active display changes to blue because the display image 87AKC2 such as the effect execution example 87AKM22 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the display mode of the active display changes to green because the display image 87AKC3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM23 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1. After the variable display of the effect execution example 87AKM01 is started and before the reach is established, which is the first timing, a suggestion effect is produced by displaying one of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 as in the effect execution example 87AKM11 to 87AKM13. After the execution, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display mode of the active display changes to red because the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM24 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1.

In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display based on the non-reach variation pattern, for example, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM31 shown in FIG. The display result of the display is derived and ends. In the case of the effect execution example 87AKM21, in the variable display by the variation pattern other than the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode as in the effect execution example 87AKM32 shown in FIG. 32-19 (B2), for example. , Reach is established. After the reach is established, there are cases where the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed and the variable display ends, and there are cases where the reach effect that becomes the super reach is executed and the super development occurs.

FIG. 32-20 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM41 of a variable end in which the variable display ends when the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed when the reach effect that becomes the normal reach is executed. .. FIG. 32-20 (A2) shows an execution example 87AKM42 of super development in which the reach effect of normal reach develops into the reach effect of super reach. When a reach effect that becomes a super reach is executed as in the effect execution example 87AKM42, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" may be reduced and displayed. .. Further, a small symbol display area may be arranged at a predetermined position on the screen of the image display device 5. The small symbol display area is smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion on the screen of the image display device 5. There is. In the small symbol display area, variable display of small symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is smaller than the identification information image which is the effect image showing the decorative pattern, and the variable display can be executed in a manner in which a part or all of the identification information image showing the decorative pattern is common. Any reduced identification information image may be used. For example, when the identification information image showing the decorative symbol includes a part showing a number and a part showing a character, the effect image showing the small symbol corresponds to the same symbol number as the part showing the number included in the decorative symbol. Since it is an image showing the numbers and does not include a part showing a character, it suffices if a small symbol can be displayed in a simpler manner than an effect image showing a decorative symbol. In this way, in the small symbol display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the small symbol which is the reduced identification information is variably displayed, and the definite small symbol which is the display result is derived. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position where it can be visually recognized at all times. In the small symbol display area, by displaying the small symbols in a simple manner, it is sufficient to prevent the display contents and display results of the small symbols from being misidentified by the player.

Following the super development in the production execution example 87AKM42, the reach production that becomes the super reach may proceed as in the production execution example 87AKM43 shown in FIG. 32-20 (B). After the reach effect in the effect execution example 87AKM43, the display mode of the active display changes with the execution of the cut-in effect or without the execution of the cut-in effect in response to the cut-in effect which is the second timing. The suggestion effect that suggests the above becomes feasible. FIG. 32-20 (C1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM51 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87 AKD1 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect is not executed. By determining without the display image used for the cut-in effect in step 87AKS105 of the effect determination process, even if the cut-in effect is not executed, the suggestion effect corresponding to the second timing is displayed in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process. When the image is determined, the suggestion effect can be executed even if the cut-in effect is not executed at the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing. FIG. 32-20 (C2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM52 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD2 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect by displaying the display image 87AKE2 is executed. ing. FIG. 32-20 (C3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM53 in which a suggestion effect by displaying the display image 87AKD3 is executed corresponding to the second timing when the cut-in effect by displaying the display image 87AKE3 is executed. ing. The change effect is executed after the suggestion effect in any of the effect execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53 is executed corresponding to the cut-in effect that is the second timing. At this time, the display mode of the active display can be changed according to the change pattern of the second timing determined in step 87AKS103 of the effect determination process.

FIG. 32-21 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM61 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-1 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC2 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to blue display. FIG. 32-21 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM62 when the change effect according to the change pattern 87AKP1-2 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC3 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM62, the display mode of the active display changes to green display. FIG. 32-21 (A3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM63 when the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3 is executed corresponding to the second timing. By displaying the display image 87AKC4 in the active display area 87AKA1 of the effect execution example 87AKM63, the display mode of the active display changes to red display.

After the reach production that becomes the super reach such as the production execution examples 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, at the time of the cut-in production that is the second timing, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the production execution examples 87AKM51 to 87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-1, the display image 87AKC2 such as the effect execution example 87AKM61 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The mode changes to blue display. At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-2, the display image 87AKC3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM62 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The aspect changes to green display. At the time of the cut-in effect which is the second timing after the reach effect which becomes the super reach such as the effect execution example 87AKM42 and 87AKM43 is started, any of the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3 like the effect execution example 87AKM51-87AKM53. After executing the suggestion effect by displaying, in the change effect by the change pattern 87AKP1-3, the display image 87AKC4 such as the effect execution example 87AKM63 is displayed in the active display area 87AKA1 to display the active display. The mode changes to red display. The movement of the player is promoted after a part or all of the cut-in effect, the suggestion effect, and the change effect corresponding to the second timing are executed, or after the reach effect progresses without executing these effects. The promotion effect is executed.

FIG. 32-21 (B1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM71 in which a promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF1 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 32-21 (B2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM72 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF2 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. FIG. 32-21 (B3) shows an effect execution example 87AKM73 in which the promotion effect by displaying the display image 87AKF3 is executed following the effect execution example 87AKM63. After the cut-in effect, which is the second timing, the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the small V-con display by the display image 87AKF1 such as the effect execution example 87AKM71, and the effect execution example 87AKM72. The promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the medium V-con display by the display image 87AKF2, and the promotion effect is executed in the effect mode of the large V-con display by the display image 87AKF3 such as the effect execution example 87AKM73. There are cases. In step 87AKS106 of the effect determination process, the feature units 87AK to 89AK correspond to the feature unit 87AK to 89AK, such as the promotion effect determination example 87AK51 for the feature unit 87AK, the promotion effect determination example 88AK01 for the feature unit 88AK, and the promotion effect determination example 89AK01 for the feature unit 89AK. The ratio is determined to be one of the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect. With the execution of the promotion effect, the effective detection period is set to effectively detect the movement of the player. During the effective detection period, it is possible to detect an operation in which the player tilts the operation stick of the stick controller 31A, such as a pulling operation on the V controller. Based on the result of detecting the movement of the player during the effective detection period, the movement effect can be executed.

FIG. 32-22 (A1) shows an effect execution example 87AKM81 when the operation effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display being “missing”. In this case, for example, the fixed decorative symbol having a reach loss such as the effect execution example 87AKM91 shown in FIG. 32-22 (B1) is stopped and displayed, so that the display result of the variable display is derived and the process ends.

FIG. 32-22 (A2) shows an effect execution example 87AKM82 when the operation effect is executed corresponding to the display result of the variable display corresponding to the “big hit”. In this case, for example, the final decoration symbol of the jackpot combination such as the effect execution example 87AKM92 shown in FIG. 32-22 (B2) is stopped and displayed, so that the display result of the variable display is derived and ends.

In this way, the promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player includes whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode, whether or not the change effect is executed and the timing, the final display image of the active display, whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode. It is possible to execute different effects in different proportions according to other effects and display states. Further, depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit", and the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit game state can be different. Further, the suggestion effect, the change effect, and the cut-in effect can be executed without detecting the movement of the player. It is possible to execute the promotion effect at a different ratio according to the presence / absence of execution of the effect, the effect mode, and the timing, which can be executed without detecting the movement of the player. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by the production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and is a part described in the above-described embodiment so as to be able to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of. For example, in a configuration such as 88AK01 for determining the promotion effect for the feature portion 88AK and 89AK01 for determining the promotion effect for the feature portion 89AK, the effect mode of the promotion effect can be determined regardless of whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the effect mode. , The cut-in effect does not have to be executed.

It suffices that the promotion effect can be executed with different proportions of the effect mode depending on the presence / absence of execution, the effect mode, the timing, or a combination of a part or all of them in an arbitrary effect different from the promotion effect. For example, when the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect to the predetermined mode may be different depending on the presence / absence of the execution, the effect mode, and the timing. The variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" can execute the revariable display once or a plurality of times after temporarily stopping the variable display after the variable display is started and then executing the variable display again. When the variable display is temporarily stopped, it may be in a predetermined temporary stop mode such as a pseudo-continuous chance eye. The pseudo-ream chance eye may include a combination of a plurality of types of temporary stop symbols according to the combination of decorative symbols. In this case, for example, the ratio of the effect mode of the promotion effect may be different depending on the pseudo-continuous chances displayed as a temporary stop.

When the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" is executed, it is possible to execute the promotion effect and the action effect a plurality of times before and after the execution of the revariable display and after each revariable display is executed. It may be. In this case, among the plurality of promotion effects, the second promotion effect executed after the first promotion effect is the presence / absence of execution in the first promotion effect, the effect mode, the timing, or a part or all of them. Depending on the combination, the ratio of the effect modes may be different and the execution may be performed.

Along with the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, or instead of the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display, it may be possible to execute the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display. In this case, the hold information related to the variable display is stored as the hold data including the random value for determining the display result, and in the first hold display area 87AKB1 and the second hold display area 87AKB2, the first hold display based on the hold information is stored. And the second hold display is executed. Then, before the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold information, the hold change effect of changing the display mode of the first hold display or the second hold display at a different rate depending on whether or not the hold information is specific information is performed. It may be feasible. In such a configuration in which the hold change effect can be executed, the promotion effect may be executed at different ratios of the effect modes depending on whether or not the hold change effect is executed, the effect mode, and the timing.

The production modes such as suggestion production, change production, cut-in production, and promotion production are not limited to those in which the production modes differ depending on the display of different display images for some or all of the production modes, and various production devices are used. Any of the production modes may be different. For example, together with the display of the display image, or instead of the display of the display image, the sound output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode in the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 and the effect LED, and the operation mode in the effect movable member. Or, depending on the combination of a part or all of them, the effect may be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes.

The advantageous state is not limited to the big hit game state, and may include a special game state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. In addition, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is one probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of consecutive chans (eg, "10"). The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not they are controlled to these advantageous states. ..

As an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, it may be controlled to a KT (small hit time) state in which the probability that the variable display result becomes a "small hit" is high. For example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the KT state may be controlled at a predetermined ratio (including 100%). The gaming state that is not in the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT state. Further, the period controlled by the KT state may be referred to as a KT period, and the period not controlled by the KT state may be referred to as a non-KT period.

In the non-KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a very long time (for example, about 30 minutes). On the other hand, in the KT state, the variable display time of the second special figure is set to a relatively short time (for example, 5 seconds). Therefore, in the KT state, when the second start winning is continuously generated due to the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is the non-KT state. It will be much better than at that time. Corresponding to the variable display using the first special figure and the second special figure, the rate at which the variable display result is determined as "small hit" is higher than the rate at which the variable display result is determined as "big hit". ing. For example, the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit" at a rate of 99/100 (99%), and the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" at a rate of 1/100 (1%). If the variable display result using the first special figure is "small hit", it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the big prize opening because the period when the big prize opening is opened is short. Therefore, the game ball, which is a prize ball, is not paid out. In the KT state, the execution frequency of the variable display using the second special figure is improved, so that the frequency at which the variable display result using the second special figure becomes a "small hit" is also improved, and the small hit game state. It becomes easier to open the big prize opening. In the KT state, when the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area (right-handed), the frequency with which the big winning opening is opened is improved as compared with the non-KT state, which is advantageous for the player. Become. The display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, which are the final display images of the active display, and the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3 used for the promotion effect may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the KT state is controlled.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 87AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. A detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display such as an active display area 87AKA1, a first hold display area 87AKB1, and a second hold display area 87AKB2, and a player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, an operation effect executing means such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process, and an effect that can execute a predetermined effect while executing the variable display, for example, step 87AKS049 of the variable display effect process. The specific display means includes a predetermined effect executing means such as a control CPU 120, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a plurality of displays such as display colors corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed by any one of the modes, and the promotion effect executing means includes, for example, a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, a V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the display image, and the predetermined effect execution means includes, for example, a predetermined mode such as a message of "super heat !!" using the display image 87AKE3. A predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as a message corresponding to the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3. For example, as in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-12, the display mode of the specific display Depending on the situation, the predetermined effect is executed at a different rate according to the predetermined mode. For example, as in the case of determining the promotion effect according to the cut-in effect in FIG. 32-13 87AK51, the predetermined effect is executed at a different rate depending on the effect mode of the predetermined effect. The promotion effect is executed according to a special mode, and is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, for example, as in the determination example 87AK51 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIG. 32-13. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by the production and improve the game interest.

For example, as shown in FIG. 32-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. You may. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect, such as during the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 32-9 (B3). As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, in the case where the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect, the display mode of the specific display is different depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. May be possible to change. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 31-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 31-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, a predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A in FIG. 31-6, is provided, for example, FIG. 32. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 88AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, the operation effect executing means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process step 87AKS053 and the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display can be executed, for example, the variable display effect process step 87AKS045 is executed. The specific display means is provided with a change effect execution means such as a CPU 120 for effect control, and the specific display means is red, for example, using the display image 87AKC4 from a period before the execution of the operation effect, such as the effect execution examples 87AKM01 to 87AKM73. The specific display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes including the specific mode such as the display, for example, the display color corresponding to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4, and the promotion effect executing means uses, for example, the display image 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3, including a special mode such as the large V-con display. For example, the change effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings, such as the executable timing of the change effect in FIG. 32-9 (B3), and the change effect can be executed according to the final display image in FIG. 32-14, for example. As in the decision example 88AK01 of the promotion effect, the promotion effect is executed in a special mode at different ratios according to the display mode of the specific display, and for example, as in the determination example 88AK01 of the promotion effect according to the change effect in FIG. 32-14. In addition, the selection ratio of the timing at which the change effect is executed differs depending on whether the promotion effect is executed in the special mode or not, and for example, the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIGS. 32-14. Promotion production as in the decision example 88AK01 It is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios according to the effect mode of. As a result, by increasing the player's interest in various productions, it is possible to appropriately raise the player's expectation by the production and improve the game interest.

For example, as shown in FIG. 32-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. You may. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, at the time of the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 32-9 (B3), the change effect may be executed by the change effect execution means in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect execution means. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, in the case where the display images 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 are determined in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect, the change effect can be executed at different ratios depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. It may be. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute the change effect by the change effect execution means. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 31-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 31-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, a predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A in FIG. 31-6, is provided, for example, FIG. 32. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 89AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a stick controller 31A and a controller sensor unit 35A. The detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, the specific display means capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display such as the active display area 87AKA1, the first hold display area 87AKAB1, and the second hold display area 87AKB2, and the player's It is possible to execute the promotion effect that promotes the operation, for example, the promotion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS051 of the effect processing during variable display, and the operation effect can be executed based on the detection result of the detection means. For example, it is possible to execute an operation effect executing means such as an effect control CPU 120 that executes step 87AKS053 of the variable display effect process and a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes, for example, the variable display effect process. The specific display means includes a suggestion effect execution means such as the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 87AKS043, and the specific display means includes a specific mode such as a red display using the display image 87AKC4, for example, a display according to the display images 87AKC1 to 87AKC4. The specific display can be displayed by any one of a plurality of display modes such as colors, and the promotion effect executing means includes, for example, a special mode such as a large V-con display using the display image 87AKF3, for example, display images 87AKF1 to 87AKF3. The promotion effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of effect modes such as the size of the V-con display according to the display, and the suggestion effect execution means is, for example, a plurality of effect modes such as the suggestion mode according to the display images 87AKD1 to 87AKD3. The suggestion effect can be executed by any of the above, and for example, as in the determination example 87AK32 of the suggestion effect in FIG. 32-11 (B), the specific display is displayed in a specific mode at a different ratio depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect. It is displayed, for example, as in the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect according to the suggestion effect in FIG. 32-15, which of the plurality of effect modes is displayed at different ratios depending on whether or not the promotion effect is executed by a special mode. The suggestion effect is executed, and is controlled to an advantageous state at different ratios depending on the effect mode of the promotion effect, as in the determination example 89AK01 of the promotion effect according to the variable display result in FIG. 32-15. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, as shown in FIG. 32-9 (B3), after the specific display is displayed by the specific display means and before the motion effect is executed by the motion effect execution means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the predetermined effect execution means. You may. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, it may be possible to change the display mode of the specific display in response to the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means, such as during the cut-in effect of the second timing in FIG. 32-9 (B3). As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, in the case where the display image 87AKE1 to 87AKE3 is determined in the determination example 87AK41 of the cut-in effect, the display mode of the specific display is different depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the predetermined effect is executed. May be possible to change. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, in the case where the first timing is determined to be the change pattern 87AKP1-3 in the change pattern determination example 87AK22, it corresponds to the case where the display mode of the specific display is the specific mode before the execution of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect executing means. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the specific display. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 31-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, the specific display may be displayed at a different ratio by any one of the plurality of display modes. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process of step S6A in FIG. 31-6 is provided with a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. Depending on the setting, a predetermined effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

For example, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, such as the CPU 103 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A in FIG. 31-6, is provided, for example, FIG. 32. As in the case of determining the promotion effect in -16, 87AK61, the promotion effect may be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes at different ratios depending on the setting of the setting means. As a result, the player's expectation can be appropriately raised by directing, and the game entertainment can be improved.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 14 ... Backup memory board 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control microcomputer 131 ... CPU
140 ... VDP
150 to 156 ... Connector 210A to 210D ... Backup data memory

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Control means and
Equipped with a storage means that can store backup data
The control means
Based on the establishment of the first backup condition, the first backup process for storing the first backup data in the storage means can be executed.
Based on the establishment of the second backup condition, the second backup process having an execution time shorter than that of the first backup process for storing the second backup data in the storage means can be executed in a priority order different from that of the first backup process. And
The information indicated by the first backup data stored by the storage means is not notified on the game machine, but the information indicated by the second backup data stored by the storage means can be notified on the game machine.
further,
A detection means that can detect the movement of the player,
Specific display means that can display specific display corresponding to variable display,
A promotion effect execution means that can execute a promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player,
An operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect based on the detection result of the detection means, and an operation effect executing means.
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect while the variable display is being executed is provided.
The specific display means can display the specific display by any one of a plurality of display modes including the specific mode.
The promotion effect execution means can execute the promotion effect by any one of a plurality of effect modes including a special mode.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of effect modes including the predetermined mode.
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, the predetermined effect is executed by the predetermined mode at different rates.
The promotion effect is executed by the special aspect at different ratios according to the effect mode of the predetermined effect.
It is controlled to the advantageous state at different ratios according to the production mode of the promotion effect.
A game machine characterized by that.